LCOV - differential code coverage report
Current view: top level - src/backend/executor - nodeModifyTable.c (source / functions) Coverage Total Hit UNC UBC GIC GNC CBC DUB DCB
Current: 0e5ff9b9b45a657aea12440478dc002e9b01f138 vs 0123ce131fca454009439dfa3b2266d1d40737d7 Lines: 93.7 % 1589 1489 5 95 90 1399 2 41
Current Date: 2026-03-14 14:10:32 -0400 Functions: 97.6 % 41 40 1 11 29 1
Baseline: lcov-20260315-024220-baseline Branches: 76.2 % 1244 948 14 282 2 37 909 4 9
Baseline Date: 2026-03-14 15:27:56 +0100 Line coverage date bins:
Legend: Lines:     hit not hit
Branches: + taken - not taken # not executed
(7,30] days: 100.0 % 7 7 5 2
(30,360] days: 94.8 % 153 145 5 3 85 60
(360..) days: 93.6 % 1429 1337 92 1337
Function coverage date bins:
(30,360] days: 100.0 % 3 3 3
(360..) days: 97.4 % 38 37 1 8 29
Branch coverage date bins:
(7,30] days: 83.3 % 6 5 1 2 3
(30,360] days: 69.0 % 113 78 14 21 35 43
(360..) days: 76.9 % 1125 865 260 2 863

 Age         Owner                    Branch data    TLA  Line data    Source code
                                  1                 :                : /*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                  2                 :                :  *
                                  3                 :                :  * nodeModifyTable.c
                                  4                 :                :  *    routines to handle ModifyTable nodes.
                                  5                 :                :  *
                                  6                 :                :  * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2026, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
                                  7                 :                :  * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
                                  8                 :                :  *
                                  9                 :                :  *
                                 10                 :                :  * IDENTIFICATION
                                 11                 :                :  *    src/backend/executor/nodeModifyTable.c
                                 12                 :                :  *
                                 13                 :                :  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                 14                 :                :  */
                                 15                 :                : /* INTERFACE ROUTINES
                                 16                 :                :  *      ExecInitModifyTable - initialize the ModifyTable node
                                 17                 :                :  *      ExecModifyTable     - retrieve the next tuple from the node
                                 18                 :                :  *      ExecEndModifyTable  - shut down the ModifyTable node
                                 19                 :                :  *      ExecReScanModifyTable - rescan the ModifyTable node
                                 20                 :                :  *
                                 21                 :                :  *   NOTES
                                 22                 :                :  *      The ModifyTable node receives input from its outerPlan, which is
                                 23                 :                :  *      the data to insert for INSERT cases, the changed columns' new
                                 24                 :                :  *      values plus row-locating info for UPDATE and MERGE cases, or just the
                                 25                 :                :  *      row-locating info for DELETE cases.
                                 26                 :                :  *
                                 27                 :                :  *      The relation to modify can be an ordinary table, a foreign table, or a
                                 28                 :                :  *      view.  If it's a view, either it has sufficient INSTEAD OF triggers or
                                 29                 :                :  *      this node executes only MERGE ... DO NOTHING.  If the original MERGE
                                 30                 :                :  *      targeted a view not in one of those two categories, earlier processing
                                 31                 :                :  *      already pointed the ModifyTable result relation to an underlying
                                 32                 :                :  *      relation of that other view.  This node does process
                                 33                 :                :  *      ri_WithCheckOptions, which may have expressions from those other,
                                 34                 :                :  *      automatically updatable views.
                                 35                 :                :  *
                                 36                 :                :  *      MERGE runs a join between the source relation and the target table.
                                 37                 :                :  *      If any WHEN NOT MATCHED [BY TARGET] clauses are present, then the join
                                 38                 :                :  *      is an outer join that might output tuples without a matching target
                                 39                 :                :  *      tuple.  In this case, any unmatched target tuples will have NULL
                                 40                 :                :  *      row-locating info, and only INSERT can be run.  But for matched target
                                 41                 :                :  *      tuples, the row-locating info is used to determine the tuple to UPDATE
                                 42                 :                :  *      or DELETE.  When all clauses are WHEN MATCHED or WHEN NOT MATCHED BY
                                 43                 :                :  *      SOURCE, all tuples produced by the join will include a matching target
                                 44                 :                :  *      tuple, so all tuples contain row-locating info.
                                 45                 :                :  *
                                 46                 :                :  *      If the query specifies RETURNING, then the ModifyTable returns a
                                 47                 :                :  *      RETURNING tuple after completing each row insert, update, or delete.
                                 48                 :                :  *      It must be called again to continue the operation.  Without RETURNING,
                                 49                 :                :  *      we just loop within the node until all the work is done, then
                                 50                 :                :  *      return NULL.  This avoids useless call/return overhead.
                                 51                 :                :  */
                                 52                 :                : 
                                 53                 :                : #include "postgres.h"
                                 54                 :                : 
                                 55                 :                : #include "access/htup_details.h"
                                 56                 :                : #include "access/tableam.h"
                                 57                 :                : #include "access/xact.h"
                                 58                 :                : #include "commands/trigger.h"
                                 59                 :                : #include "executor/execPartition.h"
                                 60                 :                : #include "executor/executor.h"
                                 61                 :                : #include "executor/nodeModifyTable.h"
                                 62                 :                : #include "foreign/fdwapi.h"
                                 63                 :                : #include "miscadmin.h"
                                 64                 :                : #include "nodes/nodeFuncs.h"
                                 65                 :                : #include "optimizer/optimizer.h"
                                 66                 :                : #include "rewrite/rewriteHandler.h"
                                 67                 :                : #include "rewrite/rewriteManip.h"
                                 68                 :                : #include "storage/lmgr.h"
                                 69                 :                : #include "utils/builtins.h"
                                 70                 :                : #include "utils/datum.h"
                                 71                 :                : #include "utils/injection_point.h"
                                 72                 :                : #include "utils/rel.h"
                                 73                 :                : #include "utils/snapmgr.h"
                                 74                 :                : 
                                 75                 :                : 
                                 76                 :                : typedef struct MTTargetRelLookup
                                 77                 :                : {
                                 78                 :                :     Oid         relationOid;    /* hash key, must be first */
                                 79                 :                :     int         relationIndex;  /* rel's index in resultRelInfo[] array */
                                 80                 :                : } MTTargetRelLookup;
                                 81                 :                : 
                                 82                 :                : /*
                                 83                 :                :  * Context struct for a ModifyTable operation, containing basic execution
                                 84                 :                :  * state and some output variables populated by ExecUpdateAct() and
                                 85                 :                :  * ExecDeleteAct() to report the result of their actions to callers.
                                 86                 :                :  */
                                 87                 :                : typedef struct ModifyTableContext
                                 88                 :                : {
                                 89                 :                :     /* Operation state */
                                 90                 :                :     ModifyTableState *mtstate;
                                 91                 :                :     EPQState   *epqstate;
                                 92                 :                :     EState     *estate;
                                 93                 :                : 
                                 94                 :                :     /*
                                 95                 :                :      * Slot containing tuple obtained from ModifyTable's subplan.  Used to
                                 96                 :                :      * access "junk" columns that are not going to be stored.
                                 97                 :                :      */
                                 98                 :                :     TupleTableSlot *planSlot;
                                 99                 :                : 
                                100                 :                :     /*
                                101                 :                :      * Information about the changes that were made concurrently to a tuple
                                102                 :                :      * being updated or deleted
                                103                 :                :      */
                                104                 :                :     TM_FailureData tmfd;
                                105                 :                : 
                                106                 :                :     /*
                                107                 :                :      * The tuple deleted when doing a cross-partition UPDATE with a RETURNING
                                108                 :                :      * clause that refers to OLD columns (converted to the root's tuple
                                109                 :                :      * descriptor).
                                110                 :                :      */
                                111                 :                :     TupleTableSlot *cpDeletedSlot;
                                112                 :                : 
                                113                 :                :     /*
                                114                 :                :      * The tuple projected by the INSERT's RETURNING clause, when doing a
                                115                 :                :      * cross-partition UPDATE
                                116                 :                :      */
                                117                 :                :     TupleTableSlot *cpUpdateReturningSlot;
                                118                 :                : } ModifyTableContext;
                                119                 :                : 
                                120                 :                : /*
                                121                 :                :  * Context struct containing output data specific to UPDATE operations.
                                122                 :                :  */
                                123                 :                : typedef struct UpdateContext
                                124                 :                : {
                                125                 :                :     bool        crossPartUpdate;    /* was it a cross-partition update? */
                                126                 :                :     TU_UpdateIndexes updateIndexes; /* Which index updates are required? */
                                127                 :                : 
                                128                 :                :     /*
                                129                 :                :      * Lock mode to acquire on the latest tuple version before performing
                                130                 :                :      * EvalPlanQual on it
                                131                 :                :      */
                                132                 :                :     LockTupleMode lockmode;
                                133                 :                : } UpdateContext;
                                134                 :                : 
                                135                 :                : 
                                136                 :                : static void ExecBatchInsert(ModifyTableState *mtstate,
                                137                 :                :                             ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                                138                 :                :                             TupleTableSlot **slots,
                                139                 :                :                             TupleTableSlot **planSlots,
                                140                 :                :                             int numSlots,
                                141                 :                :                             EState *estate,
                                142                 :                :                             bool canSetTag);
                                143                 :                : static void ExecPendingInserts(EState *estate);
                                144                 :                : static void ExecCrossPartitionUpdateForeignKey(ModifyTableContext *context,
                                145                 :                :                                                ResultRelInfo *sourcePartInfo,
                                146                 :                :                                                ResultRelInfo *destPartInfo,
                                147                 :                :                                                ItemPointer tupleid,
                                148                 :                :                                                TupleTableSlot *oldslot,
                                149                 :                :                                                TupleTableSlot *newslot);
                                150                 :                : static bool ExecOnConflictLockRow(ModifyTableContext *context,
                                151                 :                :                                   TupleTableSlot *existing,
                                152                 :                :                                   ItemPointer conflictTid,
                                153                 :                :                                   Relation relation,
                                154                 :                :                                   LockTupleMode lockmode,
                                155                 :                :                                   bool isUpdate);
                                156                 :                : static bool ExecOnConflictUpdate(ModifyTableContext *context,
                                157                 :                :                                  ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                                158                 :                :                                  ItemPointer conflictTid,
                                159                 :                :                                  TupleTableSlot *excludedSlot,
                                160                 :                :                                  bool canSetTag,
                                161                 :                :                                  TupleTableSlot **returning);
                                162                 :                : static bool ExecOnConflictSelect(ModifyTableContext *context,
                                163                 :                :                                  ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                                164                 :                :                                  ItemPointer conflictTid,
                                165                 :                :                                  TupleTableSlot *excludedSlot,
                                166                 :                :                                  bool canSetTag,
                                167                 :                :                                  TupleTableSlot **returning);
                                168                 :                : static TupleTableSlot *ExecPrepareTupleRouting(ModifyTableState *mtstate,
                                169                 :                :                                                EState *estate,
                                170                 :                :                                                PartitionTupleRouting *proute,
                                171                 :                :                                                ResultRelInfo *targetRelInfo,
                                172                 :                :                                                TupleTableSlot *slot,
                                173                 :                :                                                ResultRelInfo **partRelInfo);
                                174                 :                : 
                                175                 :                : static TupleTableSlot *ExecMerge(ModifyTableContext *context,
                                176                 :                :                                  ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                                177                 :                :                                  ItemPointer tupleid,
                                178                 :                :                                  HeapTuple oldtuple,
                                179                 :                :                                  bool canSetTag);
                                180                 :                : static void ExecInitMerge(ModifyTableState *mtstate, EState *estate);
                                181                 :                : static TupleTableSlot *ExecMergeMatched(ModifyTableContext *context,
                                182                 :                :                                         ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                                183                 :                :                                         ItemPointer tupleid,
                                184                 :                :                                         HeapTuple oldtuple,
                                185                 :                :                                         bool canSetTag,
                                186                 :                :                                         bool *matched);
                                187                 :                : static TupleTableSlot *ExecMergeNotMatched(ModifyTableContext *context,
                                188                 :                :                                            ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                                189                 :                :                                            bool canSetTag);
                                190                 :                : 
                                191                 :                : 
                                192                 :                : /*
                                193                 :                :  * Verify that the tuples to be produced by INSERT match the
                                194                 :                :  * target relation's rowtype
                                195                 :                :  *
                                196                 :                :  * We do this to guard against stale plans.  If plan invalidation is
                                197                 :                :  * functioning properly then we should never get a failure here, but better
                                198                 :                :  * safe than sorry.  Note that this is called after we have obtained lock
                                199                 :                :  * on the target rel, so the rowtype can't change underneath us.
                                200                 :                :  *
                                201                 :                :  * The plan output is represented by its targetlist, because that makes
                                202                 :                :  * handling the dropped-column case easier.
                                203                 :                :  *
                                204                 :                :  * We used to use this for UPDATE as well, but now the equivalent checks
                                205                 :                :  * are done in ExecBuildUpdateProjection.
                                206                 :                :  */
                                207                 :                : static void
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         208                 :CBC       45402 : ExecCheckPlanOutput(Relation resultRel, List *targetList)
                                209                 :                : {
                                210                 :          45402 :     TupleDesc   resultDesc = RelationGetDescr(resultRel);
                                211                 :          45402 :     int         attno = 0;
                                212                 :                :     ListCell   *lc;
                                213                 :                : 
                                214   [ +  +  +  +  :         139622 :     foreach(lc, targetList)
                                              +  + ]
                                215                 :                :     {
                                216                 :          94220 :         TargetEntry *tle = (TargetEntry *) lfirst(lc);
                                217                 :                :         Form_pg_attribute attr;
                                218                 :                : 
 1810                           219         [ -  + ]:          94220 :         Assert(!tle->resjunk);   /* caller removed junk items already */
                                220                 :                : 
 6000                           221         [ -  + ]:          94220 :         if (attno >= resultDesc->natts)
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         222         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :             ereport(ERROR,
                                223                 :                :                     (errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH),
                                224                 :                :                      errmsg("table row type and query-specified row type do not match"),
                                225                 :                :                      errdetail("Query has too many columns.")));
 3129 andres@anarazel.de        226                 :CBC       94220 :         attr = TupleDescAttr(resultDesc, attno);
                                227                 :          94220 :         attno++;
                                228                 :                : 
                                229                 :                :         /*
                                230                 :                :          * Special cases here should match planner's expand_insert_targetlist.
                                231                 :                :          */
  334 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         232         [ +  + ]:          94220 :         if (attr->attisdropped)
                                233                 :                :         {
                                234                 :                :             /*
                                235                 :                :              * For a dropped column, we can't check atttypid (it's likely 0).
                                236                 :                :              * In any case the planner has most likely inserted an INT4 null.
                                237                 :                :              * What we insist on is just *some* NULL constant.
                                238                 :                :              */
                                239         [ +  - ]:            344 :             if (!IsA(tle->expr, Const) ||
                                240         [ -  + ]:            344 :                 !((Const *) tle->expr)->constisnull)
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         241         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                 ereport(ERROR,
                                242                 :                :                         (errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH),
                                243                 :                :                          errmsg("table row type and query-specified row type do not match"),
                                244                 :                :                          errdetail("Query provides a value for a dropped column at ordinal position %d.",
                                245                 :                :                                    attno)));
                                246                 :                :         }
  334 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         247         [ +  + ]:CBC       93876 :         else if (attr->attgenerated)
                                248                 :                :         {
                                249                 :                :             /*
                                250                 :                :              * For a generated column, the planner will have inserted a null
                                251                 :                :              * of the column's base type (to avoid possibly failing on domain
                                252                 :                :              * not-null constraints).  It doesn't seem worth insisting on that
                                253                 :                :              * exact type though, since a null value is type-independent.  As
                                254                 :                :              * above, just insist on *some* NULL constant.
                                255                 :                :              */
 6000                           256         [ +  - ]:            613 :             if (!IsA(tle->expr, Const) ||
                                257         [ -  + ]:            613 :                 !((Const *) tle->expr)->constisnull)
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         258         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                 ereport(ERROR,
                                259                 :                :                         (errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH),
                                260                 :                :                          errmsg("table row type and query-specified row type do not match"),
                                261                 :                :                          errdetail("Query provides a value for a generated column at ordinal position %d.",
                                262                 :                :                                    attno)));
                                263                 :                :         }
                                264                 :                :         else
                                265                 :                :         {
                                266                 :                :             /* Normal case: demand type match */
  334 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         267         [ -  + ]:CBC       93263 :             if (exprType((Node *) tle->expr) != attr->atttypid)
  334 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         268         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                 ereport(ERROR,
                                269                 :                :                         (errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH),
                                270                 :                :                          errmsg("table row type and query-specified row type do not match"),
                                271                 :                :                          errdetail("Table has type %s at ordinal position %d, but query expects %s.",
                                272                 :                :                                    format_type_be(attr->atttypid),
                                273                 :                :                                    attno,
                                274                 :                :                                    format_type_be(exprType((Node *) tle->expr)))));
                                275                 :                :         }
                                276                 :                :     }
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         277         [ -  + ]:CBC       45402 :     if (attno != resultDesc->natts)
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         278         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :         ereport(ERROR,
                                279                 :                :                 (errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH),
                                280                 :                :                  errmsg("table row type and query-specified row type do not match"),
                                281                 :                :                  errdetail("Query has too few columns.")));
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         282                 :CBC       45402 : }
                                283                 :                : 
                                284                 :                : /*
                                285                 :                :  * ExecProcessReturning --- evaluate a RETURNING list
                                286                 :                :  *
                                287                 :                :  * context: context for the ModifyTable operation
                                288                 :                :  * resultRelInfo: current result rel
                                289                 :                :  * isDelete: true if the operation/merge action is a DELETE
                                290                 :                :  * oldSlot: slot holding old tuple deleted or updated
                                291                 :                :  * newSlot: slot holding new tuple inserted or updated
                                292                 :                :  * planSlot: slot holding tuple returned by top subplan node
                                293                 :                :  *
                                294                 :                :  * Note: If oldSlot and newSlot are NULL, the FDW should have already provided
                                295                 :                :  * econtext's scan tuple and its old & new tuples are not needed (FDW direct-
                                296                 :                :  * modify is disabled if the RETURNING list refers to any OLD/NEW values).
                                297                 :                :  *
                                298                 :                :  * Note: For the SELECT path of INSERT ... ON CONFLICT DO SELECT, oldSlot and
                                299                 :                :  * newSlot are both the existing tuple, since it's not changed.
                                300                 :                :  *
                                301                 :                :  * Returns a slot holding the result tuple
                                302                 :                :  */
                                303                 :                : static TupleTableSlot *
  423 dean.a.rasheed@gmail      304                 :           4684 : ExecProcessReturning(ModifyTableContext *context,
                                305                 :                :                      ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                                306                 :                :                      bool isDelete,
                                307                 :                :                      TupleTableSlot *oldSlot,
                                308                 :                :                      TupleTableSlot *newSlot,
                                309                 :                :                      TupleTableSlot *planSlot)
                                310                 :                : {
                                311                 :           4684 :     EState     *estate = context->estate;
 3649 rhaas@postgresql.org      312                 :           4684 :     ProjectionInfo *projectReturning = resultRelInfo->ri_projectReturning;
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         313                 :           4684 :     ExprContext *econtext = projectReturning->pi_exprContext;
                                314                 :                : 
                                315                 :                :     /* Make tuple and any needed join variables available to ExecProject */
   31 dean.a.rasheed@gmail      316         [ +  + ]:GNC        4684 :     if (isDelete)
                                317                 :                :     {
                                318                 :                :         /* return old tuple by default */
                                319         [ +  + ]:            721 :         if (oldSlot)
                                320                 :            602 :             econtext->ecxt_scantuple = oldSlot;
                                321                 :                :     }
                                322                 :                :     else
                                323                 :                :     {
                                324                 :                :         /* return new tuple by default */
                                325         [ +  + ]:           3963 :         if (newSlot)
                                326                 :           3735 :             econtext->ecxt_scantuple = newSlot;
                                327                 :                :     }
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         328                 :CBC        4684 :     econtext->ecxt_outertuple = planSlot;
                                329                 :                : 
                                330                 :                :     /* Make old/new tuples available to ExecProject, if required */
  423 dean.a.rasheed@gmail      331         [ +  + ]:           4684 :     if (oldSlot)
                                332                 :           2052 :         econtext->ecxt_oldtuple = oldSlot;
                                333         [ +  + ]:           2632 :     else if (projectReturning->pi_state.flags & EEO_FLAG_HAS_OLD)
                                334                 :             95 :         econtext->ecxt_oldtuple = ExecGetAllNullSlot(estate, resultRelInfo);
                                335                 :                :     else
                                336                 :           2537 :         econtext->ecxt_oldtuple = NULL; /* No references to OLD columns */
                                337                 :                : 
                                338         [ +  + ]:           4684 :     if (newSlot)
                                339                 :           3735 :         econtext->ecxt_newtuple = newSlot;
                                340         [ +  + ]:            949 :     else if (projectReturning->pi_state.flags & EEO_FLAG_HAS_NEW)
                                341                 :             66 :         econtext->ecxt_newtuple = ExecGetAllNullSlot(estate, resultRelInfo);
                                342                 :                :     else
                                343                 :            883 :         econtext->ecxt_newtuple = NULL; /* No references to NEW columns */
                                344                 :                : 
                                345                 :                :     /*
                                346                 :                :      * Tell ExecProject whether or not the OLD/NEW rows actually exist.  This
                                347                 :                :      * information is required to evaluate ReturningExpr nodes and also in
                                348                 :                :      * ExecEvalSysVar() and ExecEvalWholeRowVar().
                                349                 :                :      */
                                350         [ +  + ]:           4684 :     if (oldSlot == NULL)
                                351                 :           2632 :         projectReturning->pi_state.flags |= EEO_FLAG_OLD_IS_NULL;
                                352                 :                :     else
                                353                 :           2052 :         projectReturning->pi_state.flags &= ~EEO_FLAG_OLD_IS_NULL;
                                354                 :                : 
                                355         [ +  + ]:           4684 :     if (newSlot == NULL)
                                356                 :            949 :         projectReturning->pi_state.flags |= EEO_FLAG_NEW_IS_NULL;
                                357                 :                :     else
                                358                 :           3735 :         projectReturning->pi_state.flags &= ~EEO_FLAG_NEW_IS_NULL;
                                359                 :                : 
                                360                 :                :     /* Compute the RETURNING expressions */
 3342 andres@anarazel.de        361                 :           4684 :     return ExecProject(projectReturning);
                                362                 :                : }
                                363                 :                : 
                                364                 :                : /*
                                365                 :                :  * ExecCheckTupleVisible -- verify tuple is visible
                                366                 :                :  *
                                367                 :                :  * It would not be consistent with guarantees of the higher isolation levels to
                                368                 :                :  * proceed with avoiding insertion (taking speculative insertion's alternative
                                369                 :                :  * path) on the basis of another tuple that is not visible to MVCC snapshot.
                                370                 :                :  * Check for the need to raise a serialization failure, and do so as necessary.
                                371                 :                :  */
                                372                 :                : static void
 2549                           373                 :           2781 : ExecCheckTupleVisible(EState *estate,
                                374                 :                :                       Relation rel,
                                375                 :                :                       TupleTableSlot *slot)
                                376                 :                : {
 3964                           377         [ +  + ]:           2781 :     if (!IsolationUsesXactSnapshot())
                                378                 :           2743 :         return;
                                379                 :                : 
 2549                           380         [ +  + ]:             38 :     if (!table_tuple_satisfies_snapshot(rel, slot, estate->es_snapshot))
                                381                 :                :     {
                                382                 :                :         Datum       xminDatum;
                                383                 :                :         TransactionId xmin;
                                384                 :                :         bool        isnull;
                                385                 :                : 
                                386                 :             26 :         xminDatum = slot_getsysattr(slot, MinTransactionIdAttributeNumber, &isnull);
                                387         [ -  + ]:             26 :         Assert(!isnull);
                                388                 :             26 :         xmin = DatumGetTransactionId(xminDatum);
                                389                 :                : 
                                390                 :                :         /*
                                391                 :                :          * We should not raise a serialization failure if the conflict is
                                392                 :                :          * against a tuple inserted by our own transaction, even if it's not
                                393                 :                :          * visible to our snapshot.  (This would happen, for example, if
                                394                 :                :          * conflicting keys are proposed for insertion in a single command.)
                                395                 :                :          */
                                396         [ +  + ]:             26 :         if (!TransactionIdIsCurrentTransactionId(xmin))
 3430 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         397         [ +  - ]:             10 :             ereport(ERROR,
                                398                 :                :                     (errcode(ERRCODE_T_R_SERIALIZATION_FAILURE),
                                399                 :                :                      errmsg("could not serialize access due to concurrent update")));
                                400                 :                :     }
                                401                 :                : }
                                402                 :                : 
                                403                 :                : /*
                                404                 :                :  * ExecCheckTIDVisible -- convenience variant of ExecCheckTupleVisible()
                                405                 :                :  */
                                406                 :                : static void
 3964 andres@anarazel.de        407                 :            112 : ExecCheckTIDVisible(EState *estate,
                                408                 :                :                     ResultRelInfo *relinfo,
                                409                 :                :                     ItemPointer tid,
                                410                 :                :                     TupleTableSlot *tempSlot)
                                411                 :                : {
                                412                 :            112 :     Relation    rel = relinfo->ri_RelationDesc;
                                413                 :                : 
                                414                 :                :     /* Redundantly check isolation level */
                                415         [ +  + ]:            112 :     if (!IsolationUsesXactSnapshot())
                                416                 :             80 :         return;
                                417                 :                : 
 2488                           418         [ -  + ]:             32 :     if (!table_tuple_fetch_row_version(rel, tid, SnapshotAny, tempSlot))
 3964 andres@anarazel.de        419         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :         elog(ERROR, "failed to fetch conflicting tuple for ON CONFLICT");
 2549 andres@anarazel.de        420                 :CBC          32 :     ExecCheckTupleVisible(estate, rel, tempSlot);
                                421                 :             22 :     ExecClearTuple(tempSlot);
                                422                 :                : }
                                423                 :                : 
                                424                 :                : /*
                                425                 :                :  * Initialize generated columns handling for a tuple
                                426                 :                :  *
                                427                 :                :  * This fills the resultRelInfo's ri_GeneratedExprsI/ri_NumGeneratedNeededI or
                                428                 :                :  * ri_GeneratedExprsU/ri_NumGeneratedNeededU fields, depending on cmdtype.
                                429                 :                :  * This is used only for stored generated columns.
                                430                 :                :  *
                                431                 :                :  * If cmdType == CMD_UPDATE, the ri_extraUpdatedCols field is filled too.
                                432                 :                :  * This is used by both stored and virtual generated columns.
                                433                 :                :  *
                                434                 :                :  * Note: usually, a given query would need only one of ri_GeneratedExprsI and
                                435                 :                :  * ri_GeneratedExprsU per result rel; but MERGE can need both, and so can
                                436                 :                :  * cross-partition UPDATEs, since a partition might be the target of both
                                437                 :                :  * UPDATE and INSERT actions.
                                438                 :                :  */
                                439                 :                : void
  401 peter@eisentraut.org      440                 :          29875 : ExecInitGenerated(ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                                441                 :                :                   EState *estate,
                                442                 :                :                   CmdType cmdtype)
                                443                 :                : {
 2542                           444                 :          29875 :     Relation    rel = resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc;
                                445                 :          29875 :     TupleDesc   tupdesc = RelationGetDescr(rel);
                                446                 :          29875 :     int         natts = tupdesc->natts;
                                447                 :                :     ExprState **ri_GeneratedExprs;
                                448                 :                :     int         ri_NumGeneratedNeeded;
                                449                 :                :     Bitmapset  *updatedCols;
                                450                 :                :     MemoryContext oldContext;
                                451                 :                : 
                                452                 :                :     /* Nothing to do if no generated columns */
  401                           453   [ +  +  +  +  :          29875 :     if (!(tupdesc->constr && (tupdesc->constr->has_generated_stored || tupdesc->constr->has_generated_virtual)))
                                              +  + ]
 1165 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         454                 :          29273 :         return;
                                455                 :                : 
                                456                 :                :     /*
                                457                 :                :      * In an UPDATE, we can skip computing any generated columns that do not
                                458                 :                :      * depend on any UPDATE target column.  But if there is a BEFORE ROW
                                459                 :                :      * UPDATE trigger, we cannot skip because the trigger might change more
                                460                 :                :      * columns.
                                461                 :                :      */
                                462         [ +  + ]:            602 :     if (cmdtype == CMD_UPDATE &&
                                463   [ +  +  -  + ]:            135 :         !(rel->trigdesc && rel->trigdesc->trig_update_before_row))
                                464                 :            113 :         updatedCols = ExecGetUpdatedCols(resultRelInfo, estate);
                                465                 :                :     else
                                466                 :            489 :         updatedCols = NULL;
                                467                 :                : 
                                468                 :                :     /*
                                469                 :                :      * Make sure these data structures are built in the per-query memory
                                470                 :                :      * context so they'll survive throughout the query.
                                471                 :                :      */
                                472                 :            602 :     oldContext = MemoryContextSwitchTo(estate->es_query_cxt);
                                473                 :                : 
 1105                           474                 :            602 :     ri_GeneratedExprs = (ExprState **) palloc0(natts * sizeof(ExprState *));
                                475                 :            602 :     ri_NumGeneratedNeeded = 0;
                                476                 :                : 
 1165                           477         [ +  + ]:           2453 :     for (int i = 0; i < natts; i++)
                                478                 :                :     {
  401 peter@eisentraut.org      479                 :           1854 :         char        attgenerated = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i)->attgenerated;
                                480                 :                : 
                                481         [ +  + ]:           1854 :         if (attgenerated)
                                482                 :                :         {
                                483                 :                :             Expr       *expr;
                                484                 :                : 
                                485                 :                :             /* Fetch the GENERATED AS expression tree */
 1165 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         486                 :            644 :             expr = (Expr *) build_column_default(rel, i + 1);
                                487         [ -  + ]:            644 :             if (expr == NULL)
 1165 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         488         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                 elog(ERROR, "no generation expression found for column number %d of table \"%s\"",
                                489                 :                :                      i + 1, RelationGetRelationName(rel));
                                490                 :                : 
                                491                 :                :             /*
                                492                 :                :              * If it's an update with a known set of update target columns,
                                493                 :                :              * see if we can skip the computation.
                                494                 :                :              */
 1165 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         495         [ +  + ]:CBC         644 :             if (updatedCols)
                                496                 :                :             {
                                497                 :            120 :                 Bitmapset  *attrs_used = NULL;
                                498                 :                : 
                                499                 :            120 :                 pull_varattnos((Node *) expr, 1, &attrs_used);
                                500                 :                : 
                                501         [ +  + ]:            120 :                 if (!bms_overlap(updatedCols, attrs_used))
                                502                 :             12 :                     continue;   /* need not update this column */
                                503                 :                :             }
                                504                 :                : 
                                505                 :                :             /* No luck, so prepare the expression for execution */
  401 peter@eisentraut.org      506         [ +  + ]:            632 :             if (attgenerated == ATTRIBUTE_GENERATED_STORED)
                                507                 :                :             {
                                508                 :            590 :                 ri_GeneratedExprs[i] = ExecPrepareExpr(expr, estate);
                                509                 :            587 :                 ri_NumGeneratedNeeded++;
                                510                 :                :             }
                                511                 :                : 
                                512                 :                :             /* If UPDATE, mark column in resultRelInfo->ri_extraUpdatedCols */
 1105 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         513         [ +  + ]:            629 :             if (cmdtype == CMD_UPDATE)
                                514                 :            134 :                 resultRelInfo->ri_extraUpdatedCols =
                                515                 :            134 :                     bms_add_member(resultRelInfo->ri_extraUpdatedCols,
                                516                 :                :                                    i + 1 - FirstLowInvalidHeapAttributeNumber);
                                517                 :                :         }
                                518                 :                :     }
                                519                 :                : 
  401 peter@eisentraut.org      520         [ +  + ]:            599 :     if (ri_NumGeneratedNeeded == 0)
                                521                 :                :     {
                                522                 :                :         /* didn't need it after all */
                                523                 :             21 :         pfree(ri_GeneratedExprs);
                                524                 :             21 :         ri_GeneratedExprs = NULL;
                                525                 :                :     }
                                526                 :                : 
                                527                 :                :     /* Save in appropriate set of fields */
 1105 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         528         [ +  + ]:            599 :     if (cmdtype == CMD_UPDATE)
                                529                 :                :     {
                                530                 :                :         /* Don't call twice */
                                531         [ -  + ]:            135 :         Assert(resultRelInfo->ri_GeneratedExprsU == NULL);
                                532                 :                : 
                                533                 :            135 :         resultRelInfo->ri_GeneratedExprsU = ri_GeneratedExprs;
                                534                 :            135 :         resultRelInfo->ri_NumGeneratedNeededU = ri_NumGeneratedNeeded;
                                535                 :                : 
  401 peter@eisentraut.org      536                 :            135 :         resultRelInfo->ri_extraUpdatedCols_valid = true;
                                537                 :                :     }
                                538                 :                :     else
                                539                 :                :     {
                                540                 :                :         /* Don't call twice */
 1105 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         541         [ -  + ]:            464 :         Assert(resultRelInfo->ri_GeneratedExprsI == NULL);
                                542                 :                : 
                                543                 :            464 :         resultRelInfo->ri_GeneratedExprsI = ri_GeneratedExprs;
                                544                 :            464 :         resultRelInfo->ri_NumGeneratedNeededI = ri_NumGeneratedNeeded;
                                545                 :                :     }
                                546                 :                : 
 1165                           547                 :            599 :     MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldContext);
                                548                 :                : }
                                549                 :                : 
                                550                 :                : /*
                                551                 :                :  * Compute stored generated columns for a tuple
                                552                 :                :  */
                                553                 :                : void
                                554                 :            824 : ExecComputeStoredGenerated(ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                                555                 :                :                            EState *estate, TupleTableSlot *slot,
                                556                 :                :                            CmdType cmdtype)
                                557                 :                : {
                                558                 :            824 :     Relation    rel = resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc;
                                559                 :            824 :     TupleDesc   tupdesc = RelationGetDescr(rel);
                                560                 :            824 :     int         natts = tupdesc->natts;
                                561         [ +  + ]:            824 :     ExprContext *econtext = GetPerTupleExprContext(estate);
                                562                 :                :     ExprState **ri_GeneratedExprs;
                                563                 :                :     MemoryContext oldContext;
                                564                 :                :     Datum      *values;
                                565                 :                :     bool       *nulls;
                                566                 :                : 
                                567                 :                :     /* We should not be called unless this is true */
                                568   [ +  -  -  + ]:            824 :     Assert(tupdesc->constr && tupdesc->constr->has_generated_stored);
                                569                 :                : 
                                570                 :                :     /*
                                571                 :                :      * Initialize the expressions if we didn't already, and check whether we
                                572                 :                :      * can exit early because nothing needs to be computed.
                                573                 :                :      */
 1105                           574         [ +  + ]:            824 :     if (cmdtype == CMD_UPDATE)
                                575                 :                :     {
                                576         [ +  + ]:            146 :         if (resultRelInfo->ri_GeneratedExprsU == NULL)
  401 peter@eisentraut.org      577                 :            110 :             ExecInitGenerated(resultRelInfo, estate, cmdtype);
 1105 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         578         [ +  + ]:            146 :         if (resultRelInfo->ri_NumGeneratedNeededU == 0)
                                579                 :              9 :             return;
                                580                 :            137 :         ri_GeneratedExprs = resultRelInfo->ri_GeneratedExprsU;
                                581                 :                :     }
                                582                 :                :     else
                                583                 :                :     {
                                584         [ +  + ]:            678 :         if (resultRelInfo->ri_GeneratedExprsI == NULL)
  401 peter@eisentraut.org      585                 :            467 :             ExecInitGenerated(resultRelInfo, estate, cmdtype);
                                586                 :                :         /* Early exit is impossible given the prior Assert */
 1105 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         587         [ -  + ]:            675 :         Assert(resultRelInfo->ri_NumGeneratedNeededI > 0);
                                588                 :            675 :         ri_GeneratedExprs = resultRelInfo->ri_GeneratedExprsI;
                                589                 :                :     }
                                590                 :                : 
 2542 peter@eisentraut.org      591         [ +  - ]:            812 :     oldContext = MemoryContextSwitchTo(GetPerTupleMemoryContext(estate));
                                592                 :                : 
   95 michael@paquier.xyz       593                 :GNC         812 :     values = palloc_array(Datum, natts);
                                594                 :            812 :     nulls = palloc_array(bool, natts);
                                595                 :                : 
 2496 peter@eisentraut.org      596                 :CBC         812 :     slot_getallattrs(slot);
                                597                 :            812 :     memcpy(nulls, slot->tts_isnull, sizeof(*nulls) * natts);
                                598                 :                : 
 2542                           599         [ +  + ]:           3307 :     for (int i = 0; i < natts; i++)
                                600                 :                :     {
  450 drowley@postgresql.o      601                 :           2507 :         CompactAttribute *attr = TupleDescCompactAttr(tupdesc, i);
                                602                 :                : 
 1105 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         603         [ +  + ]:           2507 :         if (ri_GeneratedExprs[i])
                                604                 :                :         {
                                605                 :                :             Datum       val;
                                606                 :                :             bool        isnull;
                                607                 :                : 
  450 drowley@postgresql.o      608         [ -  + ]:            823 :             Assert(TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i)->attgenerated == ATTRIBUTE_GENERATED_STORED);
                                609                 :                : 
 2542 peter@eisentraut.org      610                 :            823 :             econtext->ecxt_scantuple = slot;
                                611                 :                : 
 1105 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         612                 :            823 :             val = ExecEvalExpr(ri_GeneratedExprs[i], econtext, &isnull);
                                613                 :                : 
                                614                 :                :             /*
                                615                 :                :              * We must make a copy of val as we have no guarantees about where
                                616                 :                :              * memory for a pass-by-reference Datum is located.
                                617                 :                :              */
 2157 drowley@postgresql.o      618         [ +  + ]:            811 :             if (!isnull)
                                619                 :            787 :                 val = datumCopy(val, attr->attbyval, attr->attlen);
                                620                 :                : 
 2542 peter@eisentraut.org      621                 :            811 :             values[i] = val;
                                622                 :            811 :             nulls[i] = isnull;
                                623                 :                :         }
                                624                 :                :         else
                                625                 :                :         {
 2496                           626         [ +  + ]:           1684 :             if (!nulls[i])
                                627                 :           1610 :                 values[i] = datumCopy(slot->tts_values[i], attr->attbyval, attr->attlen);
                                628                 :                :         }
                                629                 :                :     }
                                630                 :                : 
                                631                 :            800 :     ExecClearTuple(slot);
                                632                 :            800 :     memcpy(slot->tts_values, values, sizeof(*values) * natts);
                                633                 :            800 :     memcpy(slot->tts_isnull, nulls, sizeof(*nulls) * natts);
                                634                 :            800 :     ExecStoreVirtualTuple(slot);
                                635                 :            800 :     ExecMaterializeSlot(slot);
                                636                 :                : 
 2542                           637                 :            800 :     MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldContext);
                                638                 :                : }
                                639                 :                : 
                                640                 :                : /*
                                641                 :                :  * ExecInitInsertProjection
                                642                 :                :  *      Do one-time initialization of projection data for INSERT tuples.
                                643                 :                :  *
                                644                 :                :  * INSERT queries may need a projection to filter out junk attrs in the tlist.
                                645                 :                :  *
                                646                 :                :  * This is also a convenient place to verify that the
                                647                 :                :  * output of an INSERT matches the target table.
                                648                 :                :  */
                                649                 :                : static void
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         650                 :          44856 : ExecInitInsertProjection(ModifyTableState *mtstate,
                                651                 :                :                          ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo)
                                652                 :                : {
                                653                 :          44856 :     ModifyTable *node = (ModifyTable *) mtstate->ps.plan;
                                654                 :          44856 :     Plan       *subplan = outerPlan(node);
                                655                 :          44856 :     EState     *estate = mtstate->ps.state;
                                656                 :          44856 :     List       *insertTargetList = NIL;
                                657                 :          44856 :     bool        need_projection = false;
                                658                 :                :     ListCell   *l;
                                659                 :                : 
                                660                 :                :     /* Extract non-junk columns of the subplan's result tlist. */
                                661   [ +  +  +  +  :         137663 :     foreach(l, subplan->targetlist)
                                              +  + ]
                                662                 :                :     {
                                663                 :          92807 :         TargetEntry *tle = (TargetEntry *) lfirst(l);
                                664                 :                : 
                                665         [ +  - ]:          92807 :         if (!tle->resjunk)
                                666                 :          92807 :             insertTargetList = lappend(insertTargetList, tle);
                                667                 :                :         else
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         668                 :UBC           0 :             need_projection = true;
                                669                 :                :     }
                                670                 :                : 
                                671                 :                :     /*
                                672                 :                :      * The junk-free list must produce a tuple suitable for the result
                                673                 :                :      * relation.
                                674                 :                :      */
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         675                 :CBC       44856 :     ExecCheckPlanOutput(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc, insertTargetList);
                                676                 :                : 
                                677                 :                :     /* We'll need a slot matching the table's format. */
                                678                 :          44856 :     resultRelInfo->ri_newTupleSlot =
                                679                 :          44856 :         table_slot_create(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc,
                                680                 :                :                           &estate->es_tupleTable);
                                681                 :                : 
                                682                 :                :     /* Build ProjectionInfo if needed (it probably isn't). */
                                683         [ -  + ]:          44856 :     if (need_projection)
                                684                 :                :     {
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         685                 :UBC           0 :         TupleDesc   relDesc = RelationGetDescr(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc);
                                686                 :                : 
                                687                 :                :         /* need an expression context to do the projection */
                                688         [ #  # ]:              0 :         if (mtstate->ps.ps_ExprContext == NULL)
                                689                 :              0 :             ExecAssignExprContext(estate, &mtstate->ps);
                                690                 :                : 
                                691                 :              0 :         resultRelInfo->ri_projectNew =
                                692                 :              0 :             ExecBuildProjectionInfo(insertTargetList,
                                693                 :                :                                     mtstate->ps.ps_ExprContext,
                                694                 :                :                                     resultRelInfo->ri_newTupleSlot,
                                695                 :                :                                     &mtstate->ps,
                                696                 :                :                                     relDesc);
                                697                 :                :     }
                                698                 :                : 
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         699                 :CBC       44856 :     resultRelInfo->ri_projectNewInfoValid = true;
                                700                 :          44856 : }
                                701                 :                : 
                                702                 :                : /*
                                703                 :                :  * ExecInitUpdateProjection
                                704                 :                :  *      Do one-time initialization of projection data for UPDATE tuples.
                                705                 :                :  *
                                706                 :                :  * UPDATE always needs a projection, because (1) there's always some junk
                                707                 :                :  * attrs, and (2) we may need to merge values of not-updated columns from
                                708                 :                :  * the old tuple into the final tuple.  In UPDATE, the tuple arriving from
                                709                 :                :  * the subplan contains only new values for the changed columns, plus row
                                710                 :                :  * identity info in the junk attrs.
                                711                 :                :  *
                                712                 :                :  * This is "one-time" for any given result rel, but we might touch more than
                                713                 :                :  * one result rel in the course of an inherited UPDATE, and each one needs
                                714                 :                :  * its own projection due to possible column order variation.
                                715                 :                :  *
                                716                 :                :  * This is also a convenient place to verify that the output of an UPDATE
                                717                 :                :  * matches the target table (ExecBuildUpdateProjection does that).
                                718                 :                :  */
                                719                 :                : static void
                                720                 :           7055 : ExecInitUpdateProjection(ModifyTableState *mtstate,
                                721                 :                :                          ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo)
                                722                 :                : {
                                723                 :           7055 :     ModifyTable *node = (ModifyTable *) mtstate->ps.plan;
                                724                 :           7055 :     Plan       *subplan = outerPlan(node);
                                725                 :           7055 :     EState     *estate = mtstate->ps.state;
                                726                 :           7055 :     TupleDesc   relDesc = RelationGetDescr(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc);
                                727                 :                :     int         whichrel;
                                728                 :                :     List       *updateColnos;
                                729                 :                : 
                                730                 :                :     /*
                                731                 :                :      * Usually, mt_lastResultIndex matches the target rel.  If it happens not
                                732                 :                :      * to, we can get the index the hard way with an integer division.
                                733                 :                :      */
                                734                 :           7055 :     whichrel = mtstate->mt_lastResultIndex;
                                735         [ -  + ]:           7055 :     if (resultRelInfo != mtstate->resultRelInfo + whichrel)
                                736                 :                :     {
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         737                 :UBC           0 :         whichrel = resultRelInfo - mtstate->resultRelInfo;
                                738   [ #  #  #  # ]:              0 :         Assert(whichrel >= 0 && whichrel < mtstate->mt_nrels);
                                739                 :                :     }
                                740                 :                : 
  401 amitlan@postgresql.o      741                 :CBC        7055 :     updateColnos = (List *) list_nth(mtstate->mt_updateColnosLists, whichrel);
                                742                 :                : 
                                743                 :                :     /*
                                744                 :                :      * For UPDATE, we use the old tuple to fill up missing values in the tuple
                                745                 :                :      * produced by the subplan to get the new tuple.  We need two slots, both
                                746                 :                :      * matching the table's desired format.
                                747                 :                :      */
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         748                 :           7055 :     resultRelInfo->ri_oldTupleSlot =
                                749                 :           7055 :         table_slot_create(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc,
                                750                 :                :                           &estate->es_tupleTable);
                                751                 :           7055 :     resultRelInfo->ri_newTupleSlot =
                                752                 :           7055 :         table_slot_create(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc,
                                753                 :                :                           &estate->es_tupleTable);
                                754                 :                : 
                                755                 :                :     /* need an expression context to do the projection */
                                756         [ +  + ]:           7055 :     if (mtstate->ps.ps_ExprContext == NULL)
                                757                 :           6346 :         ExecAssignExprContext(estate, &mtstate->ps);
                                758                 :                : 
                                759                 :           7055 :     resultRelInfo->ri_projectNew =
                                760                 :           7055 :         ExecBuildUpdateProjection(subplan->targetlist,
                                761                 :                :                                   false,    /* subplan did the evaluation */
                                762                 :                :                                   updateColnos,
                                763                 :                :                                   relDesc,
                                764                 :                :                                   mtstate->ps.ps_ExprContext,
                                765                 :                :                                   resultRelInfo->ri_newTupleSlot,
                                766                 :                :                                   &mtstate->ps);
                                767                 :                : 
                                768                 :           7055 :     resultRelInfo->ri_projectNewInfoValid = true;
                                769                 :           7055 : }
                                770                 :                : 
                                771                 :                : /*
                                772                 :                :  * ExecGetInsertNewTuple
                                773                 :                :  *      This prepares a "new" tuple ready to be inserted into given result
                                774                 :                :  *      relation, by removing any junk columns of the plan's output tuple
                                775                 :                :  *      and (if necessary) coercing the tuple to the right tuple format.
                                776                 :                :  */
                                777                 :                : static TupleTableSlot *
 1810                           778                 :        6902758 : ExecGetInsertNewTuple(ResultRelInfo *relinfo,
                                779                 :                :                       TupleTableSlot *planSlot)
                                780                 :                : {
                                781                 :        6902758 :     ProjectionInfo *newProj = relinfo->ri_projectNew;
                                782                 :                :     ExprContext *econtext;
                                783                 :                : 
                                784                 :                :     /*
                                785                 :                :      * If there's no projection to be done, just make sure the slot is of the
                                786                 :                :      * right type for the target rel.  If the planSlot is the right type we
                                787                 :                :      * can use it as-is, else copy the data into ri_newTupleSlot.
                                788                 :                :      */
                                789         [ +  - ]:        6902758 :     if (newProj == NULL)
                                790                 :                :     {
                                791         [ +  + ]:        6902758 :         if (relinfo->ri_newTupleSlot->tts_ops != planSlot->tts_ops)
                                792                 :                :         {
                                793                 :        6490448 :             ExecCopySlot(relinfo->ri_newTupleSlot, planSlot);
                                794                 :        6490448 :             return relinfo->ri_newTupleSlot;
                                795                 :                :         }
                                796                 :                :         else
                                797                 :         412310 :             return planSlot;
                                798                 :                :     }
                                799                 :                : 
                                800                 :                :     /*
                                801                 :                :      * Else project; since the projection output slot is ri_newTupleSlot, this
                                802                 :                :      * will also fix any slot-type problem.
                                803                 :                :      *
                                804                 :                :      * Note: currently, this is dead code, because INSERT cases don't receive
                                805                 :                :      * any junk columns so there's never a projection to be done.
                                806                 :                :      */
 1810 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         807                 :UBC           0 :     econtext = newProj->pi_exprContext;
                                808                 :              0 :     econtext->ecxt_outertuple = planSlot;
                                809                 :              0 :     return ExecProject(newProj);
                                810                 :                : }
                                811                 :                : 
                                812                 :                : /*
                                813                 :                :  * ExecGetUpdateNewTuple
                                814                 :                :  *      This prepares a "new" tuple by combining an UPDATE subplan's output
                                815                 :                :  *      tuple (which contains values of changed columns) with unchanged
                                816                 :                :  *      columns taken from the old tuple.
                                817                 :                :  *
                                818                 :                :  * The subplan tuple might also contain junk columns, which are ignored.
                                819                 :                :  * Note that the projection also ensures we have a slot of the right type.
                                820                 :                :  */
                                821                 :                : TupleTableSlot *
 1810 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         822                 :CBC      160168 : ExecGetUpdateNewTuple(ResultRelInfo *relinfo,
                                823                 :                :                       TupleTableSlot *planSlot,
                                824                 :                :                       TupleTableSlot *oldSlot)
                                825                 :                : {
 1098 dean.a.rasheed@gmail      826                 :         160168 :     ProjectionInfo *newProj = relinfo->ri_projectNew;
                                827                 :                :     ExprContext *econtext;
                                828                 :                : 
                                829                 :                :     /* Use a few extra Asserts to protect against outside callers */
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         830         [ -  + ]:         160168 :     Assert(relinfo->ri_projectNewInfoValid);
 1810                           831   [ +  -  -  + ]:         160168 :     Assert(planSlot != NULL && !TTS_EMPTY(planSlot));
                                832   [ +  -  -  + ]:         160168 :     Assert(oldSlot != NULL && !TTS_EMPTY(oldSlot));
                                833                 :                : 
                                834                 :         160168 :     econtext = newProj->pi_exprContext;
                                835                 :         160168 :     econtext->ecxt_outertuple = planSlot;
                                836                 :         160168 :     econtext->ecxt_scantuple = oldSlot;
                                837                 :         160168 :     return ExecProject(newProj);
                                838                 :                : }
                                839                 :                : 
                                840                 :                : /* ----------------------------------------------------------------
                                841                 :                :  *      ExecInsert
                                842                 :                :  *
                                843                 :                :  *      For INSERT, we have to insert the tuple into the target relation
                                844                 :                :  *      (or partition thereof) and insert appropriate tuples into the index
                                845                 :                :  *      relations.
                                846                 :                :  *
                                847                 :                :  *      slot contains the new tuple value to be stored.
                                848                 :                :  *
                                849                 :                :  *      Returns RETURNING result if any, otherwise NULL.
                                850                 :                :  *      *inserted_tuple is the tuple that's effectively inserted;
                                851                 :                :  *      *insert_destrel is the relation where it was inserted.
                                852                 :                :  *      These are only set on success.
                                853                 :                :  *
                                854                 :                :  *      This may change the currently active tuple conversion map in
                                855                 :                :  *      mtstate->mt_transition_capture, so the callers must take care to
                                856                 :                :  *      save the previous value to avoid losing track of it.
                                857                 :                :  * ----------------------------------------------------------------
                                858                 :                :  */
                                859                 :                : static TupleTableSlot *
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.      860                 :        6904171 : ExecInsert(ModifyTableContext *context,
                                861                 :                :            ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                                862                 :                :            TupleTableSlot *slot,
                                863                 :                :            bool canSetTag,
                                864                 :                :            TupleTableSlot **inserted_tuple,
                                865                 :                :            ResultRelInfo **insert_destrel)
                                866                 :                : {
                                867                 :        6904171 :     ModifyTableState *mtstate = context->mtstate;
                                868                 :        6904171 :     EState     *estate = context->estate;
                                869                 :                :     Relation    resultRelationDesc;
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         870                 :        6904171 :     List       *recheckIndexes = NIL;
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.      871                 :        6904171 :     TupleTableSlot *planSlot = context->planSlot;
 3261 rhaas@postgresql.org      872                 :        6904171 :     TupleTableSlot *result = NULL;
                                873                 :                :     TransitionCaptureState *ar_insert_trig_tcs;
 2918 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.      874                 :        6904171 :     ModifyTable *node = (ModifyTable *) mtstate->ps.plan;
                                875                 :        6904171 :     OnConflictAction onconflict = node->onConflictAction;
 1978 heikki.linnakangas@i      876                 :        6904171 :     PartitionTupleRouting *proute = mtstate->mt_partition_tuple_routing;
                                877                 :                :     MemoryContext oldContext;
                                878                 :                : 
                                879                 :                :     /*
                                880                 :                :      * If the input result relation is a partitioned table, find the leaf
                                881                 :                :      * partition to insert the tuple into.
                                882                 :                :      */
                                883         [ +  + ]:        6904171 :     if (proute)
                                884                 :                :     {
                                885                 :                :         ResultRelInfo *partRelInfo;
                                886                 :                : 
                                887                 :         387969 :         slot = ExecPrepareTupleRouting(mtstate, estate, proute,
                                888                 :                :                                        resultRelInfo, slot,
                                889                 :                :                                        &partRelInfo);
                                890                 :         387858 :         resultRelInfo = partRelInfo;
                                891                 :                :     }
                                892                 :                : 
                                893                 :        6904060 :     ExecMaterializeSlot(slot);
                                894                 :                : 
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         895                 :        6904060 :     resultRelationDesc = resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc;
                                896                 :                : 
                                897                 :                :     /*
                                898                 :                :      * Open the table's indexes, if we have not done so already, so that we
                                899                 :                :      * can add new index entries for the inserted tuple.
                                900                 :                :      */
 1804                           901         [ +  + ]:        6904060 :     if (resultRelationDesc->rd_rel->relhasindex &&
                                902         [ +  + ]:        1924924 :         resultRelInfo->ri_IndexRelationDescs == NULL)
                                903                 :          17913 :         ExecOpenIndices(resultRelInfo, onconflict != ONCONFLICT_NONE);
                                904                 :                : 
                                905                 :                :     /*
                                906                 :                :      * BEFORE ROW INSERT Triggers.
                                907                 :                :      *
                                908                 :                :      * Note: We fire BEFORE ROW TRIGGERS for every attempted insertion in an
                                909                 :                :      * INSERT ... ON CONFLICT statement.  We cannot check for constraint
                                910                 :                :      * violations before firing these triggers, because they can change the
                                911                 :                :      * values to insert.  Also, they can run arbitrary user-defined code with
                                912                 :                :      * side-effects that we can't cancel by just not inserting the tuple.
                                913                 :                :      */
 6000                           914         [ +  + ]:        6904060 :     if (resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc &&
 5635                           915         [ +  + ]:         337799 :         resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc->trig_insert_before_row)
                                916                 :                :     {
                                917                 :                :         /* Flush any pending inserts, so rows are visible to the triggers */
 1206 efujita@postgresql.o      918         [ +  + ]:           1085 :         if (estate->es_insert_pending_result_relations != NIL)
                                919                 :              3 :             ExecPendingInserts(estate);
                                920                 :                : 
 2574 andres@anarazel.de        921         [ +  + ]:           1085 :         if (!ExecBRInsertTriggers(estate, resultRelInfo, slot))
                                922                 :            100 :             return NULL;        /* "do nothing" */
                                923                 :                :     }
                                924                 :                : 
                                925                 :                :     /* INSTEAD OF ROW INSERT Triggers */
 5635 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         926         [ +  + ]:        6903911 :     if (resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc &&
                                927         [ +  + ]:         337650 :         resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc->trig_insert_instead_row)
                                928                 :                :     {
 2574 andres@anarazel.de        929         [ +  + ]:             84 :         if (!ExecIRInsertTriggers(estate, resultRelInfo, slot))
                                930                 :              3 :             return NULL;        /* "do nothing" */
                                931                 :                :     }
 4753 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         932         [ +  + ]:        6903827 :     else if (resultRelInfo->ri_FdwRoutine)
                                933                 :                :     {
                                934                 :                :         /*
                                935                 :                :          * GENERATED expressions might reference the tableoid column, so
                                936                 :                :          * (re-)initialize tts_tableOid before evaluating them.
                                937                 :                :          */
 1759                           938                 :           1010 :         slot->tts_tableOid = RelationGetRelid(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc);
                                939                 :                : 
                                940                 :                :         /*
                                941                 :                :          * Compute stored generated columns
                                942                 :                :          */
 2542 peter@eisentraut.org      943         [ +  + ]:           1010 :         if (resultRelationDesc->rd_att->constr &&
                                944         [ +  + ]:            179 :             resultRelationDesc->rd_att->constr->has_generated_stored)
 1978 heikki.linnakangas@i      945                 :              4 :             ExecComputeStoredGenerated(resultRelInfo, estate, slot,
                                946                 :                :                                        CMD_INSERT);
                                947                 :                : 
                                948                 :                :         /*
                                949                 :                :          * If the FDW supports batching, and batching is requested, accumulate
                                950                 :                :          * rows and insert them in batches. Otherwise use the per-row inserts.
                                951                 :                :          */
 1880 tomas.vondra@postgre      952         [ +  + ]:           1010 :         if (resultRelInfo->ri_BatchSize > 1)
                                953                 :                :         {
 1206 efujita@postgresql.o      954                 :            145 :             bool        flushed = false;
                                955                 :                : 
                                956                 :                :             /*
                                957                 :                :              * When we've reached the desired batch size, perform the
                                958                 :                :              * insertion.
                                959                 :                :              */
 1880 tomas.vondra@postgre      960         [ +  + ]:            145 :             if (resultRelInfo->ri_NumSlots == resultRelInfo->ri_BatchSize)
                                961                 :                :             {
                                962                 :             10 :                 ExecBatchInsert(mtstate, resultRelInfo,
                                963                 :                :                                 resultRelInfo->ri_Slots,
                                964                 :                :                                 resultRelInfo->ri_PlanSlots,
                                965                 :                :                                 resultRelInfo->ri_NumSlots,
                                966                 :                :                                 estate, canSetTag);
 1206 efujita@postgresql.o      967                 :             10 :                 flushed = true;
                                968                 :                :             }
                                969                 :                : 
 1880 tomas.vondra@postgre      970                 :            145 :             oldContext = MemoryContextSwitchTo(estate->es_query_cxt);
                                971                 :                : 
                                972         [ +  + ]:            145 :             if (resultRelInfo->ri_Slots == NULL)
                                973                 :                :             {
   95 michael@paquier.xyz       974                 :GNC          15 :                 resultRelInfo->ri_Slots = palloc_array(TupleTableSlot *, resultRelInfo->ri_BatchSize);
                                975                 :             15 :                 resultRelInfo->ri_PlanSlots = palloc_array(TupleTableSlot *, resultRelInfo->ri_BatchSize);
                                976                 :                :             }
                                977                 :                : 
                                978                 :                :             /*
                                979                 :                :              * Initialize the batch slots. We don't know how many slots will
                                980                 :                :              * be needed, so we initialize them as the batch grows, and we
                                981                 :                :              * keep them across batches. To mitigate an inefficiency in how
                                982                 :                :              * resource owner handles objects with many references (as with
                                983                 :                :              * many slots all referencing the same tuple descriptor) we copy
                                984                 :                :              * the appropriate tuple descriptor for each slot.
                                985                 :                :              */
 1738 tomas.vondra@postgre      986         [ +  + ]:CBC         145 :             if (resultRelInfo->ri_NumSlots >= resultRelInfo->ri_NumSlotsInitialized)
                                987                 :                :             {
 1721 andrew@dunslane.net       988                 :             72 :                 TupleDesc   tdesc = CreateTupleDescCopy(slot->tts_tupleDescriptor);
                                989                 :                :                 TupleDesc   plan_tdesc =
 1031 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us         990                 :             72 :                     CreateTupleDescCopy(planSlot->tts_tupleDescriptor);
                                991                 :                : 
 1738 tomas.vondra@postgre      992                 :            144 :                 resultRelInfo->ri_Slots[resultRelInfo->ri_NumSlots] =
                                993                 :             72 :                     MakeSingleTupleTableSlot(tdesc, slot->tts_ops);
                                994                 :                : 
                                995                 :            144 :                 resultRelInfo->ri_PlanSlots[resultRelInfo->ri_NumSlots] =
 1676                           996                 :             72 :                     MakeSingleTupleTableSlot(plan_tdesc, planSlot->tts_ops);
                                997                 :                : 
                                998                 :                :                 /* remember how many batch slots we initialized */
 1738                           999                 :             72 :                 resultRelInfo->ri_NumSlotsInitialized++;
                               1000                 :                :             }
                               1001                 :                : 
 1733                          1002                 :            145 :             ExecCopySlot(resultRelInfo->ri_Slots[resultRelInfo->ri_NumSlots],
                               1003                 :                :                          slot);
                               1004                 :                : 
                               1005                 :            145 :             ExecCopySlot(resultRelInfo->ri_PlanSlots[resultRelInfo->ri_NumSlots],
                               1006                 :                :                          planSlot);
                               1007                 :                : 
                               1008                 :                :             /*
                               1009                 :                :              * If these are the first tuples stored in the buffers, add the
                               1010                 :                :              * target rel and the mtstate to the
                               1011                 :                :              * es_insert_pending_result_relations and
                               1012                 :                :              * es_insert_pending_modifytables lists respectively, except in
                               1013                 :                :              * the case where flushing was done above, in which case they
                               1014                 :                :              * would already have been added to the lists, so no need to do
                               1015                 :                :              * this.
                               1016                 :                :              */
 1206 efujita@postgresql.o     1017   [ +  +  +  + ]:            145 :             if (resultRelInfo->ri_NumSlots == 0 && !flushed)
                               1018                 :                :             {
                               1019         [ -  + ]:             19 :                 Assert(!list_member_ptr(estate->es_insert_pending_result_relations,
                               1020                 :                :                                         resultRelInfo));
                               1021                 :             19 :                 estate->es_insert_pending_result_relations =
                               1022                 :             19 :                     lappend(estate->es_insert_pending_result_relations,
                               1023                 :                :                             resultRelInfo);
 1193                          1024                 :             19 :                 estate->es_insert_pending_modifytables =
                               1025                 :             19 :                     lappend(estate->es_insert_pending_modifytables, mtstate);
                               1026                 :                :             }
 1206                          1027         [ -  + ]:            145 :             Assert(list_member_ptr(estate->es_insert_pending_result_relations,
                               1028                 :                :                                    resultRelInfo));
                               1029                 :                : 
 1880 tomas.vondra@postgre     1030                 :            145 :             resultRelInfo->ri_NumSlots++;
                               1031                 :                : 
                               1032                 :            145 :             MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldContext);
                               1033                 :                : 
                               1034                 :            145 :             return NULL;
                               1035                 :                :         }
                               1036                 :                : 
                               1037                 :                :         /*
                               1038                 :                :          * insert into foreign table: let the FDW do it
                               1039                 :                :          */
 4753 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1040                 :            865 :         slot = resultRelInfo->ri_FdwRoutine->ExecForeignInsert(estate,
                               1041                 :                :                                                                resultRelInfo,
                               1042                 :                :                                                                slot,
                               1043                 :                :                                                                planSlot);
                               1044                 :                : 
                               1045         [ +  + ]:            862 :         if (slot == NULL)       /* "do nothing" */
                               1046                 :              2 :             return NULL;
                               1047                 :                : 
                               1048                 :                :         /*
                               1049                 :                :          * AFTER ROW Triggers or RETURNING expressions might reference the
                               1050                 :                :          * tableoid column, so (re-)initialize tts_tableOid before evaluating
                               1051                 :                :          * them.  (This covers the case where the FDW replaced the slot.)
                               1052                 :                :          */
 2574 andres@anarazel.de       1053                 :            860 :         slot->tts_tableOid = RelationGetRelid(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc);
                               1054                 :                :     }
                               1055                 :                :     else
                               1056                 :                :     {
                               1057                 :                :         WCOKind     wco_kind;
                               1058                 :                : 
                               1059                 :                :         /*
                               1060                 :                :          * Constraints and GENERATED expressions might reference the tableoid
                               1061                 :                :          * column, so (re-)initialize tts_tableOid before evaluating them.
                               1062                 :                :          */
                               1063                 :        6902817 :         slot->tts_tableOid = RelationGetRelid(resultRelationDesc);
                               1064                 :                : 
                               1065                 :                :         /*
                               1066                 :                :          * Compute stored generated columns
                               1067                 :                :          */
 2542 peter@eisentraut.org     1068         [ +  + ]:        6902817 :         if (resultRelationDesc->rd_att->constr &&
                               1069         [ +  + ]:        2291129 :             resultRelationDesc->rd_att->constr->has_generated_stored)
 1978 heikki.linnakangas@i     1070                 :            653 :             ExecComputeStoredGenerated(resultRelInfo, estate, slot,
                               1071                 :                :                                        CMD_INSERT);
                               1072                 :                : 
                               1073                 :                :         /*
                               1074                 :                :          * Check any RLS WITH CHECK policies.
                               1075                 :                :          *
                               1076                 :                :          * Normally we should check INSERT policies. But if the insert is the
                               1077                 :                :          * result of a partition key update that moved the tuple to a new
                               1078                 :                :          * partition, we should instead check UPDATE policies, because we are
                               1079                 :                :          * executing policies defined on the target table, and not those
                               1080                 :                :          * defined on the child partitions.
                               1081                 :                :          *
                               1082                 :                :          * If we're running MERGE, we refer to the action that we're executing
                               1083                 :                :          * to know if we're doing an INSERT or UPDATE to a partition table.
                               1084                 :                :          */
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     1085         [ +  + ]:        6902802 :         if (mtstate->operation == CMD_UPDATE)
                               1086                 :            400 :             wco_kind = WCO_RLS_UPDATE_CHECK;
                               1087         [ +  + ]:        6902402 :         else if (mtstate->operation == CMD_MERGE)
  728 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     1088                 :            893 :             wco_kind = (mtstate->mt_merge_action->mas_action->commandType == CMD_UPDATE) ?
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     1089         [ +  + ]:            893 :                 WCO_RLS_UPDATE_CHECK : WCO_RLS_INSERT_CHECK;
                               1090                 :                :         else
                               1091                 :        6901509 :             wco_kind = WCO_RLS_INSERT_CHECK;
                               1092                 :                : 
                               1093                 :                :         /*
                               1094                 :                :          * ExecWithCheckOptions() will skip any WCOs which are not of the kind
                               1095                 :                :          * we are looking for at this point.
                               1096                 :                :          */
 3978 sfrost@snowman.net       1097         [ +  + ]:        6902802 :         if (resultRelInfo->ri_WithCheckOptions != NIL)
 2977 rhaas@postgresql.org     1098                 :            360 :             ExecWithCheckOptions(wco_kind, resultRelInfo, slot, estate);
                               1099                 :                : 
                               1100                 :                :         /*
                               1101                 :                :          * Check the constraints of the tuple.
                               1102                 :                :          */
 2834 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     1103         [ +  + ]:        6902703 :         if (resultRelationDesc->rd_att->constr)
                               1104                 :        2291060 :             ExecConstraints(resultRelInfo, slot, estate);
                               1105                 :                : 
                               1106                 :                :         /*
                               1107                 :                :          * Also check the tuple against the partition constraint, if there is
                               1108                 :                :          * one; except that if we got here via tuple-routing, we don't need to
                               1109                 :                :          * if there's no BR trigger defined on the partition.
                               1110                 :                :          */
 2006 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1111         [ +  + ]:        6902341 :         if (resultRelationDesc->rd_rel->relispartition &&
 1861 heikki.linnakangas@i     1112         [ +  + ]:         388991 :             (resultRelInfo->ri_RootResultRelInfo == NULL ||
 2834 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     1113         [ +  + ]:         387555 :              (resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc &&
                               1114         [ +  + ]:            832 :               resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc->trig_insert_before_row)))
                               1115                 :           1540 :             ExecPartitionCheck(resultRelInfo, slot, estate, true);
                               1116                 :                : 
 3964 andres@anarazel.de       1117   [ +  +  +  - ]:        6902257 :         if (onconflict != ONCONFLICT_NONE && resultRelInfo->ri_NumIndices > 0)
                               1118                 :           2118 :         {
                               1119                 :                :             /* Perform a speculative insertion. */
                               1120                 :                :             uint32      specToken;
                               1121                 :                :             ItemPointerData conflictTid;
                               1122                 :                :             ItemPointerData invalidItemPtr;
                               1123                 :                :             bool        specConflict;
                               1124                 :                :             List       *arbiterIndexes;
                               1125                 :                : 
  572 akapila@postgresql.o     1126                 :           5006 :             ItemPointerSetInvalid(&invalidItemPtr);
 2911 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     1127                 :           5006 :             arbiterIndexes = resultRelInfo->ri_onConflictArbiterIndexes;
                               1128                 :                : 
                               1129                 :                :             /*
                               1130                 :                :              * Do a non-conclusive check for conflicts first.
                               1131                 :                :              *
                               1132                 :                :              * We're not holding any locks yet, so this doesn't guarantee that
                               1133                 :                :              * the later insert won't conflict.  But it avoids leaving behind
                               1134                 :                :              * a lot of canceled speculative insertions, if you run a lot of
                               1135                 :                :              * INSERT ON CONFLICT statements that do conflict.
                               1136                 :                :              *
                               1137                 :                :              * We loop back here if we find a conflict below, either during
                               1138                 :                :              * the pre-check, or when we re-check after inserting the tuple
                               1139                 :                :              * speculatively.  Better allow interrupts in case some bug makes
                               1140                 :                :              * this an infinite loop.
                               1141                 :                :              */
 3964 andres@anarazel.de       1142                 :             14 :     vlock:
 1319 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1143         [ -  + ]:           5020 :             CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS();
 3964 andres@anarazel.de       1144                 :           5020 :             specConflict = false;
 1978 heikki.linnakangas@i     1145         [ +  + ]:           5020 :             if (!ExecCheckIndexConstraints(resultRelInfo, slot, estate,
                               1146                 :                :                                            &conflictTid, &invalidItemPtr,
                               1147                 :                :                                            arbiterIndexes))
                               1148                 :                :             {
                               1149                 :                :                 /* committed conflict tuple found */
 3964 andres@anarazel.de       1150         [ +  + ]:           2885 :                 if (onconflict == ONCONFLICT_UPDATE)
                               1151                 :                :                 {
                               1152                 :                :                     /*
                               1153                 :                :                      * In case of ON CONFLICT DO UPDATE, execute the UPDATE
                               1154                 :                :                      * part.  Be prepared to retry if the UPDATE fails because
                               1155                 :                :                      * of another concurrent UPDATE/DELETE to the conflict
                               1156                 :                :                      * tuple.
                               1157                 :                :                      */
                               1158                 :           2626 :                     TupleTableSlot *returning = NULL;
                               1159                 :                : 
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     1160         [ +  + ]:           2626 :                     if (ExecOnConflictUpdate(context, resultRelInfo,
                               1161                 :                :                                              &conflictTid, slot, canSetTag,
                               1162                 :                :                                              &returning))
                               1163                 :                :                     {
 2896                          1164         [ -  + ]:           2584 :                         InstrCountTuples2(&mtstate->ps, 1);
 3964 andres@anarazel.de       1165                 :           2584 :                         return returning;
                               1166                 :                :                     }
                               1167                 :                :                     else
                               1168                 :              3 :                         goto vlock;
                               1169                 :                :                 }
   31 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     1170         [ +  + ]:GNC         259 :                 else if (onconflict == ONCONFLICT_SELECT)
                               1171                 :                :                 {
                               1172                 :                :                     /*
                               1173                 :                :                      * In case of ON CONFLICT DO SELECT, optionally lock the
                               1174                 :                :                      * conflicting tuple, fetch it and project RETURNING on
                               1175                 :                :                      * it. Be prepared to retry if locking fails because of a
                               1176                 :                :                      * concurrent UPDATE/DELETE to the conflict tuple.
                               1177                 :                :                      */
                               1178                 :            147 :                     TupleTableSlot *returning = NULL;
                               1179                 :                : 
                               1180         [ +  - ]:            147 :                     if (ExecOnConflictSelect(context, resultRelInfo,
                               1181                 :                :                                              &conflictTid, slot, canSetTag,
                               1182                 :                :                                              &returning))
                               1183                 :                :                     {
                               1184         [ -  + ]:            135 :                         InstrCountTuples2(&mtstate->ps, 1);
                               1185                 :            135 :                         return returning;
                               1186                 :                :                     }
                               1187                 :                :                     else
   31 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     1188                 :UNC           0 :                         goto vlock;
                               1189                 :                :                 }
                               1190                 :                :                 else
                               1191                 :                :                 {
                               1192                 :                :                     /*
                               1193                 :                :                      * In case of ON CONFLICT DO NOTHING, do nothing. However,
                               1194                 :                :                      * verify that the tuple is visible to the executor's MVCC
                               1195                 :                :                      * snapshot at higher isolation levels.
                               1196                 :                :                      *
                               1197                 :                :                      * Using ExecGetReturningSlot() to store the tuple for the
                               1198                 :                :                      * recheck isn't that pretty, but we can't trivially use
                               1199                 :                :                      * the input slot, because it might not be of a compatible
                               1200                 :                :                      * type. As there's no conflicting usage of
                               1201                 :                :                      * ExecGetReturningSlot() in the DO NOTHING case...
                               1202                 :                :                      */
 3964 andres@anarazel.de       1203         [ -  + ]:CBC         112 :                     Assert(onconflict == ONCONFLICT_NOTHING);
 2549                          1204                 :            112 :                     ExecCheckTIDVisible(estate, resultRelInfo, &conflictTid,
                               1205                 :                :                                         ExecGetReturningSlot(estate, resultRelInfo));
 2896 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     1206         [ -  + ]:            102 :                     InstrCountTuples2(&mtstate->ps, 1);
 3964 andres@anarazel.de       1207                 :            102 :                     return NULL;
                               1208                 :                :                 }
                               1209                 :                :             }
                               1210                 :                : 
                               1211                 :                :             /*
                               1212                 :                :              * Before we start insertion proper, acquire our "speculative
                               1213                 :                :              * insertion lock".  Others can use that to wait for us to decide
                               1214                 :                :              * if we're going to go ahead with the insertion, instead of
                               1215                 :                :              * waiting for the whole transaction to complete.
                               1216                 :                :              */
  111 alvherre@kurilemu.de     1217                 :GNC        2132 :             INJECTION_POINT("exec-insert-before-insert-speculative", NULL);
 3964 andres@anarazel.de       1218                 :CBC        2132 :             specToken = SpeculativeInsertionLockAcquire(GetCurrentTransactionId());
                               1219                 :                : 
                               1220                 :                :             /* insert the tuple, with the speculative token */
 2488                          1221                 :           2132 :             table_tuple_insert_speculative(resultRelationDesc, slot,
                               1222                 :                :                                            estate->es_output_cid,
                               1223                 :                :                                            0,
                               1224                 :                :                                            NULL,
                               1225                 :                :                                            specToken);
                               1226                 :                : 
                               1227                 :                :             /* insert index entries for tuple */
 1978 heikki.linnakangas@i     1228                 :           2132 :             recheckIndexes = ExecInsertIndexTuples(resultRelInfo,
                               1229                 :                :                                                    estate, EIIT_NO_DUPE_ERROR,
                               1230                 :                :                                                    slot, arbiterIndexes,
                               1231                 :                :                                                    &specConflict);
                               1232                 :                : 
                               1233                 :                :             /* adjust the tuple's state accordingly */
 2488 andres@anarazel.de       1234                 :           2129 :             table_tuple_complete_speculative(resultRelationDesc, slot,
                               1235                 :           2129 :                                              specToken, !specConflict);
                               1236                 :                : 
                               1237                 :                :             /*
                               1238                 :                :              * Wake up anyone waiting for our decision.  They will re-check
                               1239                 :                :              * the tuple, see that it's no longer speculative, and wait on our
                               1240                 :                :              * XID as if this was a regularly inserted tuple all along.  Or if
                               1241                 :                :              * we killed the tuple, they will see it's dead, and proceed as if
                               1242                 :                :              * the tuple never existed.
                               1243                 :                :              */
 3964                          1244                 :           2129 :             SpeculativeInsertionLockRelease(GetCurrentTransactionId());
                               1245                 :                : 
                               1246                 :                :             /*
                               1247                 :                :              * If there was a conflict, start from the beginning.  We'll do
                               1248                 :                :              * the pre-check again, which will now find the conflicting tuple
                               1249                 :                :              * (unless it aborts before we get there).
                               1250                 :                :              */
                               1251         [ +  + ]:           2129 :             if (specConflict)
                               1252                 :                :             {
                               1253                 :             11 :                 list_free(recheckIndexes);
                               1254                 :             11 :                 goto vlock;
                               1255                 :                :             }
                               1256                 :                : 
                               1257                 :                :             /* Since there was no insertion conflict, we're done */
                               1258                 :                :         }
                               1259                 :                :         else
                               1260                 :                :         {
                               1261                 :                :             /* insert the tuple normally */
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     1262                 :        6897251 :             table_tuple_insert(resultRelationDesc, slot,
                               1263                 :                :                                estate->es_output_cid,
                               1264                 :                :                                0, NULL);
                               1265                 :                : 
                               1266                 :                :             /* insert index entries for tuple */
                               1267         [ +  + ]:        6897239 :             if (resultRelInfo->ri_NumIndices > 0)
   26 alvherre@kurilemu.de     1268                 :GNC     1919631 :                 recheckIndexes = ExecInsertIndexTuples(resultRelInfo, estate,
                               1269                 :                :                                                        0, slot, NIL,
                               1270                 :                :                                                        NULL);
                               1271                 :                :         }
                               1272                 :                :     }
                               1273                 :                : 
 5497 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1274         [ +  + ]:CBC     6899996 :     if (canSetTag)
                               1275                 :        6899398 :         (estate->es_processed)++;
                               1276                 :                : 
                               1277                 :                :     /*
                               1278                 :                :      * If this insert is the result of a partition key update that moved the
                               1279                 :                :      * tuple to a new partition, put this row into the transition NEW TABLE,
                               1280                 :                :      * if there is one. We need to do this separately for DELETE and INSERT
                               1281                 :                :      * because they happen on different tables.
                               1282                 :                :      */
 2977 rhaas@postgresql.org     1283                 :        6899996 :     ar_insert_trig_tcs = mtstate->mt_transition_capture;
                               1284   [ +  +  +  + ]:        6899996 :     if (mtstate->operation == CMD_UPDATE && mtstate->mt_transition_capture
                               1285         [ +  + ]:             27 :         && mtstate->mt_transition_capture->tcs_update_new_table)
                               1286                 :                :     {
 1456 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     1287                 :             24 :         ExecARUpdateTriggers(estate, resultRelInfo,
                               1288                 :                :                              NULL, NULL,
                               1289                 :                :                              NULL,
                               1290                 :                :                              NULL,
                               1291                 :                :                              slot,
                               1292                 :                :                              NULL,
                               1293                 :             24 :                              mtstate->mt_transition_capture,
                               1294                 :                :                              false);
                               1295                 :                : 
                               1296                 :                :         /*
                               1297                 :                :          * We've already captured the NEW TABLE row, so make sure any AR
                               1298                 :                :          * INSERT trigger fired below doesn't capture it again.
                               1299                 :                :          */
 2977 rhaas@postgresql.org     1300                 :             24 :         ar_insert_trig_tcs = NULL;
                               1301                 :                :     }
                               1302                 :                : 
                               1303                 :                :     /* AFTER ROW INSERT Triggers */
 2574 andres@anarazel.de       1304                 :        6899996 :     ExecARInsertTriggers(estate, resultRelInfo, slot, recheckIndexes,
                               1305                 :                :                          ar_insert_trig_tcs);
                               1306                 :                : 
 5887 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1307                 :        6899995 :     list_free(recheckIndexes);
                               1308                 :                : 
                               1309                 :                :     /*
                               1310                 :                :      * Check any WITH CHECK OPTION constraints from parent views.  We are
                               1311                 :                :      * required to do this after testing all constraints and uniqueness
                               1312                 :                :      * violations per the SQL spec, so we do it after actually inserting the
                               1313                 :                :      * record into the heap and all indexes.
                               1314                 :                :      *
                               1315                 :                :      * ExecWithCheckOptions will elog(ERROR) if a violation is found, so the
                               1316                 :                :      * tuple will never be seen, if it violates the WITH CHECK OPTION.
                               1317                 :                :      *
                               1318                 :                :      * ExecWithCheckOptions() will skip any WCOs which are not of the kind we
                               1319                 :                :      * are looking for at this point.
                               1320                 :                :      */
 4623 sfrost@snowman.net       1321         [ +  + ]:        6899995 :     if (resultRelInfo->ri_WithCheckOptions != NIL)
 3978                          1322                 :            224 :         ExecWithCheckOptions(WCO_VIEW_CHECK, resultRelInfo, slot, estate);
                               1323                 :                : 
                               1324                 :                :     /* Process RETURNING if present */
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1325         [ +  + ]:        6899922 :     if (resultRelInfo->ri_projectReturning)
                               1326                 :                :     {
  423 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     1327                 :           2309 :         TupleTableSlot *oldSlot = NULL;
                               1328                 :                : 
                               1329                 :                :         /*
                               1330                 :                :          * If this is part of a cross-partition UPDATE, and the RETURNING list
                               1331                 :                :          * refers to any OLD columns, ExecDelete() will have saved the tuple
                               1332                 :                :          * deleted from the original partition, which we must use here to
                               1333                 :                :          * compute the OLD column values.  Otherwise, all OLD column values
                               1334                 :                :          * will be NULL.
                               1335                 :                :          */
                               1336         [ +  + ]:           2309 :         if (context->cpDeletedSlot)
                               1337                 :                :         {
                               1338                 :                :             TupleConversionMap *tupconv_map;
                               1339                 :                : 
                               1340                 :                :             /*
                               1341                 :                :              * Convert the OLD tuple to the new partition's format/slot, if
                               1342                 :                :              * needed.  Note that ExecDelete() already converted it to the
                               1343                 :                :              * root's partition's format/slot.
                               1344                 :                :              */
                               1345                 :             24 :             oldSlot = context->cpDeletedSlot;
                               1346                 :             24 :             tupconv_map = ExecGetRootToChildMap(resultRelInfo, estate);
                               1347         [ +  + ]:             24 :             if (tupconv_map != NULL)
                               1348                 :                :             {
                               1349                 :              8 :                 oldSlot = execute_attr_map_slot(tupconv_map->attrMap,
                               1350                 :                :                                                 oldSlot,
                               1351                 :                :                                                 ExecGetReturningSlot(estate,
                               1352                 :                :                                                                      resultRelInfo));
                               1353                 :                : 
                               1354                 :              8 :                 oldSlot->tts_tableOid = context->cpDeletedSlot->tts_tableOid;
                               1355                 :              8 :                 ItemPointerCopy(&context->cpDeletedSlot->tts_tid, &oldSlot->tts_tid);
                               1356                 :                :             }
                               1357                 :                :         }
                               1358                 :                : 
   31 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     1359                 :GNC        2309 :         result = ExecProcessReturning(context, resultRelInfo, false,
                               1360                 :                :                                       oldSlot, slot, planSlot);
                               1361                 :                : 
                               1362                 :                :         /*
                               1363                 :                :          * For a cross-partition UPDATE, release the old tuple, first making
                               1364                 :                :          * sure that the result slot has a local copy of any pass-by-reference
                               1365                 :                :          * values.
                               1366                 :                :          */
  423 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     1367         [ +  + ]:CBC        2303 :         if (context->cpDeletedSlot)
                               1368                 :                :         {
                               1369                 :             24 :             ExecMaterializeSlot(result);
                               1370                 :             24 :             ExecClearTuple(oldSlot);
                               1371         [ +  + ]:             24 :             if (context->cpDeletedSlot != oldSlot)
                               1372                 :              8 :                 ExecClearTuple(context->cpDeletedSlot);
                               1373                 :             24 :             context->cpDeletedSlot = NULL;
                               1374                 :                :         }
                               1375                 :                :     }
                               1376                 :                : 
 1456 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     1377         [ +  + ]:        6899916 :     if (inserted_tuple)
                               1378                 :            415 :         *inserted_tuple = slot;
                               1379         [ +  + ]:        6899916 :     if (insert_destrel)
                               1380                 :            415 :         *insert_destrel = resultRelInfo;
                               1381                 :                : 
 3342 rhaas@postgresql.org     1382                 :        6899916 :     return result;
                               1383                 :                : }
                               1384                 :                : 
                               1385                 :                : /* ----------------------------------------------------------------
                               1386                 :                :  *      ExecBatchInsert
                               1387                 :                :  *
                               1388                 :                :  *      Insert multiple tuples in an efficient way.
                               1389                 :                :  *      Currently, this handles inserting into a foreign table without
                               1390                 :                :  *      RETURNING clause.
                               1391                 :                :  * ----------------------------------------------------------------
                               1392                 :                :  */
                               1393                 :                : static void
 1880 tomas.vondra@postgre     1394                 :             29 : ExecBatchInsert(ModifyTableState *mtstate,
                               1395                 :                :                 ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                               1396                 :                :                 TupleTableSlot **slots,
                               1397                 :                :                 TupleTableSlot **planSlots,
                               1398                 :                :                 int numSlots,
                               1399                 :                :                 EState *estate,
                               1400                 :                :                 bool canSetTag)
                               1401                 :                : {
                               1402                 :                :     int         i;
                               1403                 :             29 :     int         numInserted = numSlots;
                               1404                 :             29 :     TupleTableSlot *slot = NULL;
                               1405                 :                :     TupleTableSlot **rslots;
                               1406                 :                : 
                               1407                 :                :     /*
                               1408                 :                :      * insert into foreign table: let the FDW do it
                               1409                 :                :      */
                               1410                 :             29 :     rslots = resultRelInfo->ri_FdwRoutine->ExecForeignBatchInsert(estate,
                               1411                 :                :                                                                   resultRelInfo,
                               1412                 :                :                                                                   slots,
                               1413                 :                :                                                                   planSlots,
                               1414                 :                :                                                                   &numInserted);
                               1415                 :                : 
                               1416         [ +  + ]:            173 :     for (i = 0; i < numInserted; i++)
                               1417                 :                :     {
                               1418                 :            145 :         slot = rslots[i];
                               1419                 :                : 
                               1420                 :                :         /*
                               1421                 :                :          * AFTER ROW Triggers might reference the tableoid column, so
                               1422                 :                :          * (re-)initialize tts_tableOid before evaluating them.
                               1423                 :                :          */
                               1424                 :            145 :         slot->tts_tableOid = RelationGetRelid(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc);
                               1425                 :                : 
                               1426                 :                :         /* AFTER ROW INSERT Triggers */
                               1427                 :            145 :         ExecARInsertTriggers(estate, resultRelInfo, slot, NIL,
                               1428                 :            145 :                              mtstate->mt_transition_capture);
                               1429                 :                : 
                               1430                 :                :         /*
                               1431                 :                :          * Check any WITH CHECK OPTION constraints from parent views.  See the
                               1432                 :                :          * comment in ExecInsert.
                               1433                 :                :          */
                               1434         [ -  + ]:            144 :         if (resultRelInfo->ri_WithCheckOptions != NIL)
 1880 tomas.vondra@postgre     1435                 :UBC           0 :             ExecWithCheckOptions(WCO_VIEW_CHECK, resultRelInfo, slot, estate);
                               1436                 :                :     }
                               1437                 :                : 
 1880 tomas.vondra@postgre     1438   [ +  -  +  - ]:CBC          28 :     if (canSetTag && numInserted > 0)
                               1439                 :             28 :         estate->es_processed += numInserted;
                               1440                 :                : 
                               1441                 :                :     /* Clean up all the slots, ready for the next batch */
 1055 michael@paquier.xyz      1442         [ +  + ]:            172 :     for (i = 0; i < numSlots; i++)
                               1443                 :                :     {
                               1444                 :            144 :         ExecClearTuple(slots[i]);
                               1445                 :            144 :         ExecClearTuple(planSlots[i]);
                               1446                 :                :     }
                               1447                 :             28 :     resultRelInfo->ri_NumSlots = 0;
 1880 tomas.vondra@postgre     1448                 :             28 : }
                               1449                 :                : 
                               1450                 :                : /*
                               1451                 :                :  * ExecPendingInserts -- flushes all pending inserts to the foreign tables
                               1452                 :                :  */
                               1453                 :                : static void
 1206 efujita@postgresql.o     1454                 :             18 : ExecPendingInserts(EState *estate)
                               1455                 :                : {
                               1456                 :                :     ListCell   *l1,
                               1457                 :                :                *l2;
                               1458                 :                : 
 1193                          1459   [ +  -  +  +  :             36 :     forboth(l1, estate->es_insert_pending_result_relations,
                                     +  -  +  +  +  
                                        +  +  -  +  
                                                 + ]
                               1460                 :                :             l2, estate->es_insert_pending_modifytables)
                               1461                 :                :     {
                               1462                 :             19 :         ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo = (ResultRelInfo *) lfirst(l1);
                               1463                 :             19 :         ModifyTableState *mtstate = (ModifyTableState *) lfirst(l2);
                               1464                 :                : 
 1206                          1465         [ -  + ]:             19 :         Assert(mtstate);
                               1466                 :             19 :         ExecBatchInsert(mtstate, resultRelInfo,
                               1467                 :                :                         resultRelInfo->ri_Slots,
                               1468                 :                :                         resultRelInfo->ri_PlanSlots,
                               1469                 :                :                         resultRelInfo->ri_NumSlots,
                               1470                 :             19 :                         estate, mtstate->canSetTag);
                               1471                 :                :     }
                               1472                 :                : 
                               1473                 :             17 :     list_free(estate->es_insert_pending_result_relations);
 1193                          1474                 :             17 :     list_free(estate->es_insert_pending_modifytables);
 1206                          1475                 :             17 :     estate->es_insert_pending_result_relations = NIL;
 1193                          1476                 :             17 :     estate->es_insert_pending_modifytables = NIL;
 1206                          1477                 :             17 : }
                               1478                 :                : 
                               1479                 :                : /*
                               1480                 :                :  * ExecDeletePrologue -- subroutine for ExecDelete
                               1481                 :                :  *
                               1482                 :                :  * Prepare executor state for DELETE.  Actually, the only thing we have to do
                               1483                 :                :  * here is execute BEFORE ROW triggers.  We return false if one of them makes
                               1484                 :                :  * the delete a no-op; otherwise, return true.
                               1485                 :                :  */
                               1486                 :                : static bool
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     1487                 :         789271 : ExecDeletePrologue(ModifyTableContext *context, ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                               1488                 :                :                    ItemPointer tupleid, HeapTuple oldtuple,
                               1489                 :                :                    TupleTableSlot **epqreturnslot, TM_Result *result)
                               1490                 :                : {
 1098 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     1491         [ +  + ]:         789271 :     if (result)
                               1492                 :            799 :         *result = TM_Ok;
                               1493                 :                : 
                               1494                 :                :     /* BEFORE ROW DELETE triggers */
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     1495         [ +  + ]:         789271 :     if (resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc &&
                               1496         [ +  + ]:           3531 :         resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc->trig_delete_before_row)
                               1497                 :                :     {
                               1498                 :                :         /* Flush any pending inserts, so rows are visible to the triggers */
 1206 efujita@postgresql.o     1499         [ +  + ]:            173 :         if (context->estate->es_insert_pending_result_relations != NIL)
                               1500                 :              1 :             ExecPendingInserts(context->estate);
                               1501                 :                : 
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     1502                 :            165 :         return ExecBRDeleteTriggers(context->estate, context->epqstate,
                               1503                 :                :                                     resultRelInfo, tupleid, oldtuple,
                               1504                 :                :                                     epqreturnslot, result, &context->tmfd,
  240 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     1505                 :            173 :                                     context->mtstate->operation == CMD_MERGE);
                               1506                 :                :     }
                               1507                 :                : 
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     1508                 :         789098 :     return true;
                               1509                 :                : }
                               1510                 :                : 
                               1511                 :                : /*
                               1512                 :                :  * ExecDeleteAct -- subroutine for ExecDelete
                               1513                 :                :  *
                               1514                 :                :  * Actually delete the tuple from a plain table.
                               1515                 :                :  *
                               1516                 :                :  * Caller is in charge of doing EvalPlanQual as necessary
                               1517                 :                :  */
                               1518                 :                : static TM_Result
                               1519                 :         789182 : ExecDeleteAct(ModifyTableContext *context, ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                               1520                 :                :               ItemPointer tupleid, bool changingPart)
                               1521                 :                : {
                               1522                 :         789182 :     EState     *estate = context->estate;
                               1523                 :                : 
                               1524                 :         789182 :     return table_tuple_delete(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc, tupleid,
                               1525                 :                :                               estate->es_output_cid,
                               1526                 :                :                               estate->es_snapshot,
                               1527                 :                :                               estate->es_crosscheck_snapshot,
                               1528                 :                :                               true /* wait for commit */ ,
                               1529                 :                :                               &context->tmfd,
                               1530                 :                :                               changingPart);
                               1531                 :                : }
                               1532                 :                : 
                               1533                 :                : /*
                               1534                 :                :  * ExecDeleteEpilogue -- subroutine for ExecDelete
                               1535                 :                :  *
                               1536                 :                :  * Closing steps of tuple deletion; this invokes AFTER FOR EACH ROW triggers,
                               1537                 :                :  * including the UPDATE triggers if the deletion is being done as part of a
                               1538                 :                :  * cross-partition tuple move.
                               1539                 :                :  */
                               1540                 :                : static void
                               1541                 :         789152 : ExecDeleteEpilogue(ModifyTableContext *context, ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                               1542                 :                :                    ItemPointer tupleid, HeapTuple oldtuple, bool changingPart)
                               1543                 :                : {
                               1544                 :         789152 :     ModifyTableState *mtstate = context->mtstate;
                               1545                 :         789152 :     EState     *estate = context->estate;
                               1546                 :                :     TransitionCaptureState *ar_delete_trig_tcs;
                               1547                 :                : 
                               1548                 :                :     /*
                               1549                 :                :      * If this delete is the result of a partition key update that moved the
                               1550                 :                :      * tuple to a new partition, put this row into the transition OLD TABLE,
                               1551                 :                :      * if there is one. We need to do this separately for DELETE and INSERT
                               1552                 :                :      * because they happen on different tables.
                               1553                 :                :      */
                               1554                 :         789152 :     ar_delete_trig_tcs = mtstate->mt_transition_capture;
                               1555   [ +  +  +  + ]:         789152 :     if (mtstate->operation == CMD_UPDATE && mtstate->mt_transition_capture &&
                               1556         [ +  + ]:             27 :         mtstate->mt_transition_capture->tcs_update_old_table)
                               1557                 :                :     {
 1456                          1558                 :             24 :         ExecARUpdateTriggers(estate, resultRelInfo,
                               1559                 :                :                              NULL, NULL,
                               1560                 :                :                              tupleid, oldtuple,
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     1561                 :             24 :                              NULL, NULL, mtstate->mt_transition_capture,
                               1562                 :                :                              false);
                               1563                 :                : 
                               1564                 :                :         /*
                               1565                 :                :          * We've already captured the OLD TABLE row, so make sure any AR
                               1566                 :                :          * DELETE trigger fired below doesn't capture it again.
                               1567                 :                :          */
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     1568                 :             24 :         ar_delete_trig_tcs = NULL;
                               1569                 :                :     }
                               1570                 :                : 
                               1571                 :                :     /* AFTER ROW DELETE Triggers */
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     1572                 :         789152 :     ExecARDeleteTriggers(estate, resultRelInfo, tupleid, oldtuple,
                               1573                 :                :                          ar_delete_trig_tcs, changingPart);
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     1574                 :         789150 : }
                               1575                 :                : 
                               1576                 :                : /* ----------------------------------------------------------------
                               1577                 :                :  *      ExecDelete
                               1578                 :                :  *
                               1579                 :                :  *      DELETE is like UPDATE, except that we delete the tuple and no
                               1580                 :                :  *      index modifications are needed.
                               1581                 :                :  *
                               1582                 :                :  *      When deleting from a table, tupleid identifies the tuple to delete and
                               1583                 :                :  *      oldtuple is NULL.  When deleting through a view INSTEAD OF trigger,
                               1584                 :                :  *      oldtuple is passed to the triggers and identifies what to delete, and
                               1585                 :                :  *      tupleid is invalid.  When deleting from a foreign table, tupleid is
                               1586                 :                :  *      invalid; the FDW has to figure out which row to delete using data from
                               1587                 :                :  *      the planSlot.  oldtuple is passed to foreign table triggers; it is
                               1588                 :                :  *      NULL when the foreign table has no relevant triggers.  We use
                               1589                 :                :  *      tupleDeleted to indicate whether the tuple is actually deleted,
                               1590                 :                :  *      callers can use it to decide whether to continue the operation.  When
                               1591                 :                :  *      this DELETE is a part of an UPDATE of partition-key, then the slot
                               1592                 :                :  *      returned by EvalPlanQual() is passed back using output parameter
                               1593                 :                :  *      epqreturnslot.
                               1594                 :                :  *
                               1595                 :                :  *      Returns RETURNING result if any, otherwise NULL.
                               1596                 :                :  * ----------------------------------------------------------------
                               1597                 :                :  */
                               1598                 :                : static TupleTableSlot *
                               1599                 :         789008 : ExecDelete(ModifyTableContext *context,
                               1600                 :                :            ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                               1601                 :                :            ItemPointer tupleid,
                               1602                 :                :            HeapTuple oldtuple,
                               1603                 :                :            bool processReturning,
                               1604                 :                :            bool changingPart,
                               1605                 :                :            bool canSetTag,
                               1606                 :                :            TM_Result *tmresult,
                               1607                 :                :            bool *tupleDeleted,
                               1608                 :                :            TupleTableSlot **epqreturnslot)
                               1609                 :                : {
                               1610                 :         789008 :     EState     *estate = context->estate;
 1978 heikki.linnakangas@i     1611                 :         789008 :     Relation    resultRelationDesc = resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc;
 4753 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1612                 :         789008 :     TupleTableSlot *slot = NULL;
                               1613                 :                :     TM_Result   result;
                               1614                 :                :     bool        saveOld;
                               1615                 :                : 
 2977 rhaas@postgresql.org     1616         [ +  + ]:         789008 :     if (tupleDeleted)
                               1617                 :            536 :         *tupleDeleted = false;
                               1618                 :                : 
                               1619                 :                :     /*
                               1620                 :                :      * Prepare for the delete.  This includes BEFORE ROW triggers, so we're
                               1621                 :                :      * done if it says we are.
                               1622                 :                :      */
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     1623         [ +  + ]:         789008 :     if (!ExecDeletePrologue(context, resultRelInfo, tupleid, oldtuple,
                               1624                 :                :                             epqreturnslot, tmresult))
                               1625                 :             26 :         return NULL;
                               1626                 :                : 
                               1627                 :                :     /* INSTEAD OF ROW DELETE Triggers */
 5635 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1628         [ +  + ]:         788974 :     if (resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc &&
                               1629         [ +  + ]:           3463 :         resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc->trig_delete_instead_row)
 6000                          1630                 :             24 :     {
                               1631                 :                :         bool        dodelete;
                               1632                 :                : 
 5635                          1633         [ -  + ]:             27 :         Assert(oldtuple != NULL);
 4375 noah@leadboat.com        1634                 :             27 :         dodelete = ExecIRDeleteTriggers(estate, resultRelInfo, oldtuple);
                               1635                 :                : 
 5635 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1636         [ +  + ]:             27 :         if (!dodelete)          /* "do nothing" */
 6000                          1637                 :              3 :             return NULL;
                               1638                 :                :     }
 4753                          1639         [ +  + ]:         788947 :     else if (resultRelInfo->ri_FdwRoutine)
                               1640                 :                :     {
                               1641                 :                :         /*
                               1642                 :                :          * delete from foreign table: let the FDW do it
                               1643                 :                :          *
                               1644                 :                :          * We offer the returning slot as a place to store RETURNING data,
                               1645                 :                :          * although the FDW can return some other slot if it wants.
                               1646                 :                :          */
 2574 andres@anarazel.de       1647                 :             23 :         slot = ExecGetReturningSlot(estate, resultRelInfo);
 4753 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1648                 :             23 :         slot = resultRelInfo->ri_FdwRoutine->ExecForeignDelete(estate,
                               1649                 :                :                                                                resultRelInfo,
                               1650                 :                :                                                                slot,
                               1651                 :                :                                                                context->planSlot);
                               1652                 :                : 
                               1653         [ -  + ]:             23 :         if (slot == NULL)       /* "do nothing" */
 4753 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1654                 :UBC           0 :             return NULL;
                               1655                 :                : 
                               1656                 :                :         /*
                               1657                 :                :          * RETURNING expressions might reference the tableoid column, so
                               1658                 :                :          * (re)initialize tts_tableOid before evaluating them.
                               1659                 :                :          */
 2708 andres@anarazel.de       1660         [ +  + ]:CBC          23 :         if (TTS_EMPTY(slot))
 3692 rhaas@postgresql.org     1661                 :              5 :             ExecStoreAllNullTuple(slot);
                               1662                 :                : 
 2574 andres@anarazel.de       1663                 :             23 :         slot->tts_tableOid = RelationGetRelid(resultRelationDesc);
                               1664                 :                :     }
                               1665                 :                :     else
                               1666                 :                :     {
                               1667                 :                :         /*
                               1668                 :                :          * delete the tuple
                               1669                 :                :          *
                               1670                 :                :          * Note: if context->estate->es_crosscheck_snapshot isn't
                               1671                 :                :          * InvalidSnapshot, we check that the row to be deleted is visible to
                               1672                 :                :          * that snapshot, and throw a can't-serialize error if not. This is a
                               1673                 :                :          * special-case behavior needed for referential integrity updates in
                               1674                 :                :          * transaction-snapshot mode transactions.
                               1675                 :                :          */
 1252 john.naylor@postgres     1676                 :         788924 : ldelete:
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     1677                 :         788928 :         result = ExecDeleteAct(context, resultRelInfo, tupleid, changingPart);
                               1678                 :                : 
  815 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     1679         [ +  + ]:         788910 :         if (tmresult)
                               1680                 :            519 :             *tmresult = result;
                               1681                 :                : 
 5635 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1682   [ +  +  +  +  :         788910 :         switch (result)
                                                 - ]
                               1683                 :                :         {
 2549 andres@anarazel.de       1684                 :             15 :             case TM_SelfModified:
                               1685                 :                : 
                               1686                 :                :                 /*
                               1687                 :                :                  * The target tuple was already updated or deleted by the
                               1688                 :                :                  * current command, or by a later command in the current
                               1689                 :                :                  * transaction.  The former case is possible in a join DELETE
                               1690                 :                :                  * where multiple tuples join to the same target tuple. This
                               1691                 :                :                  * is somewhat questionable, but Postgres has always allowed
                               1692                 :                :                  * it: we just ignore additional deletion attempts.
                               1693                 :                :                  *
                               1694                 :                :                  * The latter case arises if the tuple is modified by a
                               1695                 :                :                  * command in a BEFORE trigger, or perhaps by a command in a
                               1696                 :                :                  * volatile function used in the query.  In such situations we
                               1697                 :                :                  * should not ignore the deletion, but it is equally unsafe to
                               1698                 :                :                  * proceed.  We don't want to discard the original DELETE
                               1699                 :                :                  * while keeping the triggered actions based on its deletion;
                               1700                 :                :                  * and it would be no better to allow the original DELETE
                               1701                 :                :                  * while discarding updates that it triggered.  The row update
                               1702                 :                :                  * carries some information that might be important according
                               1703                 :                :                  * to business rules; so throwing an error is the only safe
                               1704                 :                :                  * course.
                               1705                 :                :                  *
                               1706                 :                :                  * If a trigger actually intends this type of interaction, it
                               1707                 :                :                  * can re-execute the DELETE and then return NULL to cancel
                               1708                 :                :                  * the outer delete.
                               1709                 :                :                  */
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     1710         [ +  + ]:             15 :                 if (context->tmfd.cmax != estate->es_output_cid)
 4888 kgrittn@postgresql.o     1711         [ +  - ]:              3 :                     ereport(ERROR,
                               1712                 :                :                             (errcode(ERRCODE_TRIGGERED_DATA_CHANGE_VIOLATION),
                               1713                 :                :                              errmsg("tuple to be deleted was already modified by an operation triggered by the current command"),
                               1714                 :                :                              errhint("Consider using an AFTER trigger instead of a BEFORE trigger to propagate changes to other rows.")));
                               1715                 :                : 
                               1716                 :                :                 /* Else, already deleted by self; nothing to do */
 5635 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1717                 :             12 :                 return NULL;
                               1718                 :                : 
 2549 andres@anarazel.de       1719                 :         788857 :             case TM_Ok:
 5635 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1720                 :         788857 :                 break;
                               1721                 :                : 
 2549 andres@anarazel.de       1722                 :             35 :             case TM_Updated:
                               1723                 :                :                 {
                               1724                 :                :                     TupleTableSlot *inputslot;
                               1725                 :                :                     TupleTableSlot *epqslot;
                               1726                 :                : 
                               1727         [ +  + ]:             35 :                     if (IsolationUsesXactSnapshot())
                               1728         [ +  - ]:              1 :                         ereport(ERROR,
                               1729                 :                :                                 (errcode(ERRCODE_T_R_SERIALIZATION_FAILURE),
                               1730                 :                :                                  errmsg("could not serialize access due to concurrent update")));
                               1731                 :                : 
                               1732                 :                :                     /*
                               1733                 :                :                      * Already know that we're going to need to do EPQ, so
                               1734                 :                :                      * fetch tuple directly into the right slot.
                               1735                 :                :                      */
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     1736                 :             34 :                     EvalPlanQualBegin(context->epqstate);
                               1737                 :             34 :                     inputslot = EvalPlanQualSlot(context->epqstate, resultRelationDesc,
                               1738                 :                :                                                  resultRelInfo->ri_RangeTableIndex);
                               1739                 :                : 
                               1740                 :             34 :                     result = table_tuple_lock(resultRelationDesc, tupleid,
                               1741                 :                :                                               estate->es_snapshot,
                               1742                 :                :                                               inputslot, estate->es_output_cid,
                               1743                 :                :                                               LockTupleExclusive, LockWaitBlock,
                               1744                 :                :                                               TUPLE_LOCK_FLAG_FIND_LAST_VERSION,
                               1745                 :                :                                               &context->tmfd);
                               1746                 :                : 
                               1747   [ +  +  +  - ]:             30 :                     switch (result)
                               1748                 :                :                     {
                               1749                 :             27 :                         case TM_Ok:
                               1750         [ -  + ]:             27 :                             Assert(context->tmfd.traversed);
                               1751                 :             27 :                             epqslot = EvalPlanQual(context->epqstate,
                               1752                 :                :                                                    resultRelationDesc,
                               1753                 :                :                                                    resultRelInfo->ri_RangeTableIndex,
                               1754                 :                :                                                    inputslot);
                               1755   [ +  -  +  + ]:             27 :                             if (TupIsNull(epqslot))
                               1756                 :                :                                 /* Tuple not passing quals anymore, exiting... */
                               1757                 :             15 :                                 return NULL;
                               1758                 :                : 
                               1759                 :                :                             /*
                               1760                 :                :                              * If requested, skip delete and pass back the
                               1761                 :                :                              * updated row.
                               1762                 :                :                              */
                               1763         [ +  + ]:             12 :                             if (epqreturnslot)
                               1764                 :                :                             {
                               1765                 :              8 :                                 *epqreturnslot = epqslot;
                               1766                 :              8 :                                 return NULL;
                               1767                 :                :                             }
                               1768                 :                :                             else
                               1769                 :              4 :                                 goto ldelete;
                               1770                 :                : 
                               1771                 :              2 :                         case TM_SelfModified:
                               1772                 :                : 
                               1773                 :                :                             /*
                               1774                 :                :                              * This can be reached when following an update
                               1775                 :                :                              * chain from a tuple updated by another session,
                               1776                 :                :                              * reaching a tuple that was already updated in
                               1777                 :                :                              * this transaction. If previously updated by this
                               1778                 :                :                              * command, ignore the delete, otherwise error
                               1779                 :                :                              * out.
                               1780                 :                :                              *
                               1781                 :                :                              * See also TM_SelfModified response to
                               1782                 :                :                              * table_tuple_delete() above.
                               1783                 :                :                              */
                               1784         [ +  + ]:              2 :                             if (context->tmfd.cmax != estate->es_output_cid)
                               1785         [ +  - ]:              1 :                                 ereport(ERROR,
                               1786                 :                :                                         (errcode(ERRCODE_TRIGGERED_DATA_CHANGE_VIOLATION),
                               1787                 :                :                                          errmsg("tuple to be deleted was already modified by an operation triggered by the current command"),
                               1788                 :                :                                          errhint("Consider using an AFTER trigger instead of a BEFORE trigger to propagate changes to other rows.")));
                               1789                 :              1 :                             return NULL;
                               1790                 :                : 
                               1791                 :              1 :                         case TM_Deleted:
                               1792                 :                :                             /* tuple already deleted; nothing to do */
                               1793                 :              1 :                             return NULL;
                               1794                 :                : 
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     1795                 :UBC           0 :                         default:
                               1796                 :                : 
                               1797                 :                :                             /*
                               1798                 :                :                              * TM_Invisible should be impossible because we're
                               1799                 :                :                              * waiting for updated row versions, and would
                               1800                 :                :                              * already have errored out if the first version
                               1801                 :                :                              * is invisible.
                               1802                 :                :                              *
                               1803                 :                :                              * TM_Updated should be impossible, because we're
                               1804                 :                :                              * locking the latest version via
                               1805                 :                :                              * TUPLE_LOCK_FLAG_FIND_LAST_VERSION.
                               1806                 :                :                              */
                               1807         [ #  # ]:              0 :                             elog(ERROR, "unexpected table_tuple_lock status: %u",
                               1808                 :                :                                  result);
                               1809                 :                :                             return NULL;
                               1810                 :                :                     }
                               1811                 :                : 
                               1812                 :                :                     Assert(false);
                               1813                 :                :                     break;
                               1814                 :                :                 }
                               1815                 :                : 
 2549 andres@anarazel.de       1816                 :CBC           3 :             case TM_Deleted:
                               1817         [ -  + ]:              3 :                 if (IsolationUsesXactSnapshot())
 2549 andres@anarazel.de       1818         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                     ereport(ERROR,
                               1819                 :                :                             (errcode(ERRCODE_T_R_SERIALIZATION_FAILURE),
                               1820                 :                :                              errmsg("could not serialize access due to concurrent delete")));
                               1821                 :                :                 /* tuple already deleted; nothing to do */
 5635 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1822                 :CBC           3 :                 return NULL;
                               1823                 :                : 
 5635 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1824                 :UBC           0 :             default:
 2488 andres@anarazel.de       1825         [ #  # ]:              0 :                 elog(ERROR, "unrecognized table_tuple_delete status: %u",
                               1826                 :                :                      result);
                               1827                 :                :                 return NULL;
                               1828                 :                :         }
                               1829                 :                : 
                               1830                 :                :         /*
                               1831                 :                :          * Note: Normally one would think that we have to delete index tuples
                               1832                 :                :          * associated with the heap tuple now...
                               1833                 :                :          *
                               1834                 :                :          * ... but in POSTGRES, we have no need to do this because VACUUM will
                               1835                 :                :          * take care of it later.  We can't delete index tuples immediately
                               1836                 :                :          * anyway, since the tuple is still visible to other transactions.
                               1837                 :                :          */
                               1838                 :                :     }
                               1839                 :                : 
 5497 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1840         [ +  + ]:CBC      788904 :     if (canSetTag)
                               1841                 :         788297 :         (estate->es_processed)++;
                               1842                 :                : 
                               1843                 :                :     /* Tell caller that the delete actually happened. */
 2977 rhaas@postgresql.org     1844         [ +  + ]:         788904 :     if (tupleDeleted)
                               1845                 :            493 :         *tupleDeleted = true;
                               1846                 :                : 
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     1847                 :         788904 :     ExecDeleteEpilogue(context, resultRelInfo, tupleid, oldtuple, changingPart);
                               1848                 :                : 
                               1849                 :                :     /*
                               1850                 :                :      * Process RETURNING if present and if requested.
                               1851                 :                :      *
                               1852                 :                :      * If this is part of a cross-partition UPDATE, and the RETURNING list
                               1853                 :                :      * refers to any OLD column values, save the old tuple here for later
                               1854                 :                :      * processing of the RETURNING list by ExecInsert().
                               1855                 :                :      */
  423 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     1856   [ +  +  +  + ]:         788977 :     saveOld = changingPart && resultRelInfo->ri_projectReturning &&
                               1857         [ +  + ]:             75 :         resultRelInfo->ri_projectReturning->pi_state.flags & EEO_FLAG_HAS_OLD;
                               1858                 :                : 
                               1859   [ +  +  +  +  :         788902 :     if (resultRelInfo->ri_projectReturning && (processReturning || saveOld))
                                              +  + ]
                               1860                 :                :     {
                               1861                 :                :         /*
                               1862                 :                :          * We have to put the target tuple into a slot, which means first we
                               1863                 :                :          * gotta fetch it.  We can use the trigger tuple slot.
                               1864                 :                :          */
                               1865                 :                :         TupleTableSlot *rslot;
                               1866                 :                : 
 4753 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1867         [ +  + ]:            506 :         if (resultRelInfo->ri_FdwRoutine)
                               1868                 :                :         {
                               1869                 :                :             /* FDW must have provided a slot containing the deleted row */
                               1870   [ +  -  -  + ]:              7 :             Assert(!TupIsNull(slot));
                               1871                 :                :         }
                               1872                 :                :         else
                               1873                 :                :         {
 2574 andres@anarazel.de       1874                 :            499 :             slot = ExecGetReturningSlot(estate, resultRelInfo);
 4753 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1875         [ +  + ]:            499 :             if (oldtuple != NULL)
                               1876                 :                :             {
 2522 andres@anarazel.de       1877                 :             12 :                 ExecForceStoreHeapTuple(oldtuple, slot, false);
                               1878                 :                :             }
                               1879                 :                :             else
                               1880                 :                :             {
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     1881         [ -  + ]:            487 :                 if (!table_tuple_fetch_row_version(resultRelationDesc, tupleid,
                               1882                 :                :                                                    SnapshotAny, slot))
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     1883         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                     elog(ERROR, "failed to fetch deleted tuple for DELETE RETURNING");
                               1884                 :                :             }
                               1885                 :                :         }
                               1886                 :                : 
                               1887                 :                :         /*
                               1888                 :                :          * If required, save the old tuple for later processing of the
                               1889                 :                :          * RETURNING list by ExecInsert().
                               1890                 :                :          */
  423 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     1891         [ +  + ]:CBC         506 :         if (saveOld)
                               1892                 :                :         {
                               1893                 :                :             TupleConversionMap *tupconv_map;
                               1894                 :                : 
                               1895                 :                :             /*
                               1896                 :                :              * Convert the tuple into the root partition's format/slot, if
                               1897                 :                :              * needed.  ExecInsert() will then convert it to the new
                               1898                 :                :              * partition's format/slot, if necessary.
                               1899                 :                :              */
                               1900                 :             24 :             tupconv_map = ExecGetChildToRootMap(resultRelInfo);
                               1901         [ +  + ]:             24 :             if (tupconv_map != NULL)
                               1902                 :                :             {
                               1903                 :             10 :                 ResultRelInfo *rootRelInfo = context->mtstate->rootResultRelInfo;
                               1904                 :             10 :                 TupleTableSlot *oldSlot = slot;
                               1905                 :                : 
                               1906                 :             10 :                 slot = execute_attr_map_slot(tupconv_map->attrMap,
                               1907                 :                :                                              slot,
                               1908                 :                :                                              ExecGetReturningSlot(estate,
                               1909                 :                :                                                                   rootRelInfo));
                               1910                 :                : 
                               1911                 :             10 :                 slot->tts_tableOid = oldSlot->tts_tableOid;
                               1912                 :             10 :                 ItemPointerCopy(&oldSlot->tts_tid, &slot->tts_tid);
                               1913                 :                :             }
                               1914                 :                : 
                               1915                 :             24 :             context->cpDeletedSlot = slot;
                               1916                 :                : 
                               1917                 :             24 :             return NULL;
                               1918                 :                :         }
                               1919                 :                : 
   31 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     1920                 :GNC         482 :         rslot = ExecProcessReturning(context, resultRelInfo, true,
                               1921                 :                :                                      slot, NULL, context->planSlot);
                               1922                 :                : 
                               1923                 :                :         /*
                               1924                 :                :          * Before releasing the target tuple again, make sure rslot has a
                               1925                 :                :          * local copy of any pass-by-reference values.
                               1926                 :                :          */
 4753 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1927                 :CBC         482 :         ExecMaterializeSlot(rslot);
                               1928                 :                : 
 6000                          1929                 :            482 :         ExecClearTuple(slot);
                               1930                 :                : 
                               1931                 :            482 :         return rslot;
                               1932                 :                :     }
                               1933                 :                : 
                               1934                 :         788396 :     return NULL;
                               1935                 :                : }
                               1936                 :                : 
                               1937                 :                : /*
                               1938                 :                :  * ExecCrossPartitionUpdate --- Move an updated tuple to another partition.
                               1939                 :                :  *
                               1940                 :                :  * This works by first deleting the old tuple from the current partition,
                               1941                 :                :  * followed by inserting the new tuple into the root parent table, that is,
                               1942                 :                :  * mtstate->rootResultRelInfo.  It will be re-routed from there to the
                               1943                 :                :  * correct partition.
                               1944                 :                :  *
                               1945                 :                :  * Returns true if the tuple has been successfully moved, or if it's found
                               1946                 :                :  * that the tuple was concurrently deleted so there's nothing more to do
                               1947                 :                :  * for the caller.
                               1948                 :                :  *
                               1949                 :                :  * False is returned if the tuple we're trying to move is found to have been
                               1950                 :                :  * concurrently updated.  In that case, the caller must check if the updated
                               1951                 :                :  * tuple that's returned in *retry_slot still needs to be re-routed, and call
                               1952                 :                :  * this function again or perform a regular update accordingly.  For MERGE,
                               1953                 :                :  * the updated tuple is not returned in *retry_slot; it has its own retry
                               1954                 :                :  * logic.
                               1955                 :                :  */
                               1956                 :                : static bool
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     1957                 :            560 : ExecCrossPartitionUpdate(ModifyTableContext *context,
                               1958                 :                :                          ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                               1959                 :                :                          ItemPointer tupleid, HeapTuple oldtuple,
                               1960                 :                :                          TupleTableSlot *slot,
                               1961                 :                :                          bool canSetTag,
                               1962                 :                :                          UpdateContext *updateCxt,
                               1963                 :                :                          TM_Result *tmresult,
                               1964                 :                :                          TupleTableSlot **retry_slot,
                               1965                 :                :                          TupleTableSlot **inserted_tuple,
                               1966                 :                :                          ResultRelInfo **insert_destrel)
                               1967                 :                : {
                               1968                 :            560 :     ModifyTableState *mtstate = context->mtstate;
 1977 heikki.linnakangas@i     1969                 :            560 :     EState     *estate = mtstate->ps.state;
                               1970                 :                :     TupleConversionMap *tupconv_map;
                               1971                 :                :     bool        tuple_deleted;
                               1972                 :            560 :     TupleTableSlot *epqslot = NULL;
                               1973                 :                : 
  423 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     1974                 :            560 :     context->cpDeletedSlot = NULL;
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     1975                 :            560 :     context->cpUpdateReturningSlot = NULL;
 1098 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     1976                 :            560 :     *retry_slot = NULL;
                               1977                 :                : 
                               1978                 :                :     /*
                               1979                 :                :      * Disallow an INSERT ON CONFLICT DO UPDATE that causes the original row
                               1980                 :                :      * to migrate to a different partition.  Maybe this can be implemented
                               1981                 :                :      * some day, but it seems a fringe feature with little redeeming value.
                               1982                 :                :      */
 1977 heikki.linnakangas@i     1983         [ -  + ]:            560 :     if (((ModifyTable *) mtstate->ps.plan)->onConflictAction == ONCONFLICT_UPDATE)
 1977 heikki.linnakangas@i     1984         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :         ereport(ERROR,
                               1985                 :                :                 (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED),
                               1986                 :                :                  errmsg("invalid ON UPDATE specification"),
                               1987                 :                :                  errdetail("The result tuple would appear in a different partition than the original tuple.")));
                               1988                 :                : 
                               1989                 :                :     /*
                               1990                 :                :      * When an UPDATE is run directly on a leaf partition, simply fail with a
                               1991                 :                :      * partition constraint violation error.
                               1992                 :                :      */
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1993         [ +  + ]:CBC         560 :     if (resultRelInfo == mtstate->rootResultRelInfo)
 1977 heikki.linnakangas@i     1994                 :             24 :         ExecPartitionCheckEmitError(resultRelInfo, slot, estate);
                               1995                 :                : 
                               1996                 :                :     /* Initialize tuple routing info if not already done. */
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        1997         [ +  + ]:            536 :     if (mtstate->mt_partition_tuple_routing == NULL)
                               1998                 :                :     {
                               1999                 :            343 :         Relation    rootRel = mtstate->rootResultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc;
                               2000                 :                :         MemoryContext oldcxt;
                               2001                 :                : 
                               2002                 :                :         /* Things built here have to last for the query duration. */
                               2003                 :            343 :         oldcxt = MemoryContextSwitchTo(estate->es_query_cxt);
                               2004                 :                : 
                               2005                 :            343 :         mtstate->mt_partition_tuple_routing =
                               2006                 :            343 :             ExecSetupPartitionTupleRouting(estate, rootRel);
                               2007                 :                : 
                               2008                 :                :         /*
                               2009                 :                :          * Before a partition's tuple can be re-routed, it must first be
                               2010                 :                :          * converted to the root's format, so we'll need a slot for storing
                               2011                 :                :          * such tuples.
                               2012                 :                :          */
                               2013         [ -  + ]:            343 :         Assert(mtstate->mt_root_tuple_slot == NULL);
                               2014                 :            343 :         mtstate->mt_root_tuple_slot = table_slot_create(rootRel, NULL);
                               2015                 :                : 
                               2016                 :            343 :         MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldcxt);
                               2017                 :                :     }
                               2018                 :                : 
                               2019                 :                :     /*
                               2020                 :                :      * Row movement, part 1.  Delete the tuple, but skip RETURNING processing.
                               2021                 :                :      * We want to return rows from INSERT.
                               2022                 :                :      */
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2023                 :            536 :     ExecDelete(context, resultRelInfo,
                               2024                 :                :                tupleid, oldtuple,
                               2025                 :                :                false,           /* processReturning */
                               2026                 :                :                true,            /* changingPart */
                               2027                 :                :                false,           /* canSetTag */
                               2028                 :                :                tmresult, &tuple_deleted, &epqslot);
                               2029                 :                : 
                               2030                 :                :     /*
                               2031                 :                :      * For some reason if DELETE didn't happen (e.g. trigger prevented it, or
                               2032                 :                :      * it was already deleted by self, or it was concurrently deleted by
                               2033                 :                :      * another transaction), then we should skip the insert as well;
                               2034                 :                :      * otherwise, an UPDATE could cause an increase in the total number of
                               2035                 :                :      * rows across all partitions, which is clearly wrong.
                               2036                 :                :      *
                               2037                 :                :      * For a normal UPDATE, the case where the tuple has been the subject of a
                               2038                 :                :      * concurrent UPDATE or DELETE would be handled by the EvalPlanQual
                               2039                 :                :      * machinery, but for an UPDATE that we've translated into a DELETE from
                               2040                 :                :      * this partition and an INSERT into some other partition, that's not
                               2041                 :                :      * available, because CTID chains can't span relation boundaries.  We
                               2042                 :                :      * mimic the semantics to a limited extent by skipping the INSERT if the
                               2043                 :                :      * DELETE fails to find a tuple.  This ensures that two concurrent
                               2044                 :                :      * attempts to UPDATE the same tuple at the same time can't turn one tuple
                               2045                 :                :      * into two, and that an UPDATE of a just-deleted tuple can't resurrect
                               2046                 :                :      * it.
                               2047                 :                :      */
 1977 heikki.linnakangas@i     2048         [ +  + ]:            533 :     if (!tuple_deleted)
                               2049                 :                :     {
                               2050                 :                :         /*
                               2051                 :                :          * epqslot will be typically NULL.  But when ExecDelete() finds that
                               2052                 :                :          * another transaction has concurrently updated the same row, it
                               2053                 :                :          * re-fetches the row, skips the delete, and epqslot is set to the
                               2054                 :                :          * re-fetched tuple slot.  In that case, we need to do all the checks
                               2055                 :                :          * again.  For MERGE, we leave everything to the caller (it must do
                               2056                 :                :          * additional rechecking, and might end up executing a different
                               2057                 :                :          * action entirely).
                               2058                 :                :          */
  728 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     2059         [ +  + ]:             40 :         if (mtstate->operation == CMD_MERGE)
  815                          2060                 :             19 :             return *tmresult == TM_Ok;
 1098                          2061   [ +  +  -  + ]:             21 :         else if (TupIsNull(epqslot))
 1977 heikki.linnakangas@i     2062                 :             18 :             return true;
                               2063                 :                :         else
                               2064                 :                :         {
                               2065                 :                :             /* Fetch the most recent version of old tuple. */
                               2066                 :                :             TupleTableSlot *oldSlot;
                               2067                 :                : 
                               2068                 :                :             /* ... but first, make sure ri_oldTupleSlot is initialized. */
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     2069         [ -  + ]:              3 :             if (unlikely(!resultRelInfo->ri_projectNewInfoValid))
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     2070                 :UBC           0 :                 ExecInitUpdateProjection(mtstate, resultRelInfo);
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     2071                 :CBC           3 :             oldSlot = resultRelInfo->ri_oldTupleSlot;
                               2072         [ -  + ]:              3 :             if (!table_tuple_fetch_row_version(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc,
                               2073                 :                :                                                tupleid,
                               2074                 :                :                                                SnapshotAny,
                               2075                 :                :                                                oldSlot))
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     2076         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                 elog(ERROR, "failed to fetch tuple being updated");
                               2077                 :                :             /* and project the new tuple to retry the UPDATE with */
 1098 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     2078                 :CBC           3 :             *retry_slot = ExecGetUpdateNewTuple(resultRelInfo, epqslot,
                               2079                 :                :                                                 oldSlot);
 1977 heikki.linnakangas@i     2080                 :              3 :             return false;
                               2081                 :                :         }
                               2082                 :                :     }
                               2083                 :                : 
                               2084                 :                :     /*
                               2085                 :                :      * resultRelInfo is one of the per-relation resultRelInfos.  So we should
                               2086                 :                :      * convert the tuple into root's tuple descriptor if needed, since
                               2087                 :                :      * ExecInsert() starts the search from root.
                               2088                 :                :      */
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        2089                 :            493 :     tupconv_map = ExecGetChildToRootMap(resultRelInfo);
 1977 heikki.linnakangas@i     2090         [ +  + ]:            493 :     if (tupconv_map != NULL)
                               2091                 :            158 :         slot = execute_attr_map_slot(tupconv_map->attrMap,
                               2092                 :                :                                      slot,
                               2093                 :                :                                      mtstate->mt_root_tuple_slot);
                               2094                 :                : 
                               2095                 :                :     /* Tuple routing starts from the root table. */
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2096                 :            429 :     context->cpUpdateReturningSlot =
 1456                          2097                 :            493 :         ExecInsert(context, mtstate->rootResultRelInfo, slot, canSetTag,
                               2098                 :                :                    inserted_tuple, insert_destrel);
                               2099                 :                : 
                               2100                 :                :     /*
                               2101                 :                :      * Reset the transition state that may possibly have been written by
                               2102                 :                :      * INSERT.
                               2103                 :                :      */
 1977 heikki.linnakangas@i     2104         [ +  + ]:            429 :     if (mtstate->mt_transition_capture)
                               2105                 :             27 :         mtstate->mt_transition_capture->tcs_original_insert_tuple = NULL;
                               2106                 :                : 
                               2107                 :                :     /* We're done moving. */
                               2108                 :            429 :     return true;
                               2109                 :                : }
                               2110                 :                : 
                               2111                 :                : /*
                               2112                 :                :  * ExecUpdatePrologue -- subroutine for ExecUpdate
                               2113                 :                :  *
                               2114                 :                :  * Prepare executor state for UPDATE.  This includes running BEFORE ROW
                               2115                 :                :  * triggers.  We return false if one of them makes the update a no-op;
                               2116                 :                :  * otherwise, return true.
                               2117                 :                :  */
                               2118                 :                : static bool
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2119                 :         163787 : ExecUpdatePrologue(ModifyTableContext *context, ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                               2120                 :                :                    ItemPointer tupleid, HeapTuple oldtuple, TupleTableSlot *slot,
                               2121                 :                :                    TM_Result *result)
                               2122                 :                : {
                               2123                 :         163787 :     Relation    resultRelationDesc = resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc;
                               2124                 :                : 
 1098 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     2125         [ +  + ]:         163787 :     if (result)
                               2126                 :           1098 :         *result = TM_Ok;
                               2127                 :                : 
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2128                 :         163787 :     ExecMaterializeSlot(slot);
                               2129                 :                : 
                               2130                 :                :     /*
                               2131                 :                :      * Open the table's indexes, if we have not done so already, so that we
                               2132                 :                :      * can add new index entries for the updated tuple.
                               2133                 :                :      */
                               2134         [ +  + ]:         163787 :     if (resultRelationDesc->rd_rel->relhasindex &&
                               2135         [ +  + ]:         118238 :         resultRelInfo->ri_IndexRelationDescs == NULL)
                               2136                 :           4788 :         ExecOpenIndices(resultRelInfo, false);
                               2137                 :                : 
                               2138                 :                :     /* BEFORE ROW UPDATE triggers */
                               2139         [ +  + ]:         163787 :     if (resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc &&
                               2140         [ +  + ]:           3173 :         resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc->trig_update_before_row)
                               2141                 :                :     {
                               2142                 :                :         /* Flush any pending inserts, so rows are visible to the triggers */
 1206 efujita@postgresql.o     2143         [ +  + ]:           1305 :         if (context->estate->es_insert_pending_result_relations != NIL)
                               2144                 :              1 :             ExecPendingInserts(context->estate);
                               2145                 :                : 
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2146                 :           1293 :         return ExecBRUpdateTriggers(context->estate, context->epqstate,
                               2147                 :                :                                     resultRelInfo, tupleid, oldtuple, slot,
                               2148                 :                :                                     result, &context->tmfd,
  240 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     2149                 :           1305 :                                     context->mtstate->operation == CMD_MERGE);
                               2150                 :                :     }
                               2151                 :                : 
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2152                 :         162482 :     return true;
                               2153                 :                : }
                               2154                 :                : 
                               2155                 :                : /*
                               2156                 :                :  * ExecUpdatePrepareSlot -- subroutine for ExecUpdateAct
                               2157                 :                :  *
                               2158                 :                :  * Apply the final modifications to the tuple slot before the update.
                               2159                 :                :  * (This is split out because we also need it in the foreign-table code path.)
                               2160                 :                :  */
                               2161                 :                : static void
                               2162                 :         163656 : ExecUpdatePrepareSlot(ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                               2163                 :                :                       TupleTableSlot *slot,
                               2164                 :                :                       EState *estate)
                               2165                 :                : {
                               2166                 :         163656 :     Relation    resultRelationDesc = resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc;
                               2167                 :                : 
                               2168                 :                :     /*
                               2169                 :                :      * Constraints and GENERATED expressions might reference the tableoid
                               2170                 :                :      * column, so (re-)initialize tts_tableOid before evaluating them.
                               2171                 :                :      */
                               2172                 :         163656 :     slot->tts_tableOid = RelationGetRelid(resultRelationDesc);
                               2173                 :                : 
                               2174                 :                :     /*
                               2175                 :                :      * Compute stored generated columns
                               2176                 :                :      */
                               2177         [ +  + ]:         163656 :     if (resultRelationDesc->rd_att->constr &&
                               2178         [ +  + ]:          99806 :         resultRelationDesc->rd_att->constr->has_generated_stored)
                               2179                 :            144 :         ExecComputeStoredGenerated(resultRelInfo, estate, slot,
                               2180                 :                :                                    CMD_UPDATE);
                               2181                 :         163656 : }
                               2182                 :                : 
                               2183                 :                : /*
                               2184                 :                :  * ExecUpdateAct -- subroutine for ExecUpdate
                               2185                 :                :  *
                               2186                 :                :  * Actually update the tuple, when operating on a plain table.  If the
                               2187                 :                :  * table is a partition, and the command was called referencing an ancestor
                               2188                 :                :  * partitioned table, this routine migrates the resulting tuple to another
                               2189                 :                :  * partition.
                               2190                 :                :  *
                               2191                 :                :  * The caller is in charge of keeping indexes current as necessary.  The
                               2192                 :                :  * caller is also in charge of doing EvalPlanQual if the tuple is found to
                               2193                 :                :  * be concurrently updated.  However, in case of a cross-partition update,
                               2194                 :                :  * this routine does it.
                               2195                 :                :  */
                               2196                 :                : static TM_Result
                               2197                 :         163558 : ExecUpdateAct(ModifyTableContext *context, ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                               2198                 :                :               ItemPointer tupleid, HeapTuple oldtuple, TupleTableSlot *slot,
                               2199                 :                :               bool canSetTag, UpdateContext *updateCxt)
                               2200                 :                : {
                               2201                 :         163558 :     EState     *estate = context->estate;
                               2202                 :         163558 :     Relation    resultRelationDesc = resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc;
                               2203                 :                :     bool        partition_constraint_failed;
                               2204                 :                :     TM_Result   result;
                               2205                 :                : 
                               2206                 :         163558 :     updateCxt->crossPartUpdate = false;
                               2207                 :                : 
                               2208                 :                :     /*
                               2209                 :                :      * If we move the tuple to a new partition, we loop back here to recompute
                               2210                 :                :      * GENERATED values (which are allowed to be different across partitions)
                               2211                 :                :      * and recheck any RLS policies and constraints.  We do not fire any
                               2212                 :                :      * BEFORE triggers of the new partition, however.
                               2213                 :                :      */
 1252 john.naylor@postgres     2214                 :         163561 : lreplace:
                               2215                 :                :     /* Fill in GENERATEd columns */
 1105 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        2216                 :         163561 :     ExecUpdatePrepareSlot(resultRelInfo, slot, estate);
                               2217                 :                : 
                               2218                 :                :     /* ensure slot is independent, consider e.g. EPQ */
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2219                 :         163561 :     ExecMaterializeSlot(slot);
                               2220                 :                : 
                               2221                 :                :     /*
                               2222                 :                :      * If partition constraint fails, this row might get moved to another
                               2223                 :                :      * partition, in which case we should check the RLS CHECK policy just
                               2224                 :                :      * before inserting into the new partition, rather than doing it here.
                               2225                 :                :      * This is because a trigger on that partition might again change the row.
                               2226                 :                :      * So skip the WCO checks if the partition constraint fails.
                               2227                 :                :      */
                               2228                 :         163561 :     partition_constraint_failed =
                               2229         [ +  + ]:         164957 :         resultRelationDesc->rd_rel->relispartition &&
                               2230         [ +  + ]:           1396 :         !ExecPartitionCheck(resultRelInfo, slot, estate, false);
                               2231                 :                : 
                               2232                 :                :     /* Check any RLS UPDATE WITH CHECK policies */
                               2233         [ +  + ]:         163561 :     if (!partition_constraint_failed &&
                               2234         [ +  + ]:         163001 :         resultRelInfo->ri_WithCheckOptions != NIL)
                               2235                 :                :     {
                               2236                 :                :         /*
                               2237                 :                :          * ExecWithCheckOptions() will skip any WCOs which are not of the kind
                               2238                 :                :          * we are looking for at this point.
                               2239                 :                :          */
                               2240                 :            267 :         ExecWithCheckOptions(WCO_RLS_UPDATE_CHECK,
                               2241                 :                :                              resultRelInfo, slot, estate);
                               2242                 :                :     }
                               2243                 :                : 
                               2244                 :                :     /*
                               2245                 :                :      * If a partition check failed, try to move the row into the right
                               2246                 :                :      * partition.
                               2247                 :                :      */
                               2248         [ +  + ]:         163534 :     if (partition_constraint_failed)
                               2249                 :                :     {
                               2250                 :                :         TupleTableSlot *inserted_tuple,
                               2251                 :                :                    *retry_slot;
 1456                          2252                 :            560 :         ResultRelInfo *insert_destrel = NULL;
                               2253                 :                : 
                               2254                 :                :         /*
                               2255                 :                :          * ExecCrossPartitionUpdate will first DELETE the row from the
                               2256                 :                :          * partition it's currently in and then insert it back into the root
                               2257                 :                :          * table, which will re-route it to the correct partition.  However,
                               2258                 :                :          * if the tuple has been concurrently updated, a retry is needed.
                               2259                 :                :          */
 1459                          2260         [ +  + ]:            560 :         if (ExecCrossPartitionUpdate(context, resultRelInfo,
                               2261                 :                :                                      tupleid, oldtuple, slot,
                               2262                 :                :                                      canSetTag, updateCxt,
                               2263                 :                :                                      &result,
                               2264                 :                :                                      &retry_slot,
                               2265                 :                :                                      &inserted_tuple,
                               2266                 :                :                                      &insert_destrel))
                               2267                 :                :         {
                               2268                 :                :             /* success! */
                               2269                 :            459 :             updateCxt->crossPartUpdate = true;
                               2270                 :                : 
                               2271                 :                :             /*
                               2272                 :                :              * If the partitioned table being updated is referenced in foreign
                               2273                 :                :              * keys, queue up trigger events to check that none of them were
                               2274                 :                :              * violated.  No special treatment is needed in
                               2275                 :                :              * non-cross-partition update situations, because the leaf
                               2276                 :                :              * partition's AR update triggers will take care of that.  During
                               2277                 :                :              * cross-partition updates implemented as delete on the source
                               2278                 :                :              * partition followed by insert on the destination partition,
                               2279                 :                :              * AR-UPDATE triggers of the root table (that is, the table
                               2280                 :                :              * mentioned in the query) must be fired.
                               2281                 :                :              *
                               2282                 :                :              * NULL insert_destrel means that the move failed to occur, that
                               2283                 :                :              * is, the update failed, so no need to anything in that case.
                               2284                 :                :              */
 1456                          2285         [ +  + ]:            459 :             if (insert_destrel &&
                               2286         [ +  + ]:            415 :                 resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc &&
                               2287         [ +  + ]:            184 :                 resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc->trig_update_after_row)
                               2288                 :            153 :                 ExecCrossPartitionUpdateForeignKey(context,
                               2289                 :                :                                                    resultRelInfo,
                               2290                 :                :                                                    insert_destrel,
                               2291                 :                :                                                    tupleid, slot,
                               2292                 :                :                                                    inserted_tuple);
                               2293                 :                : 
 1459                          2294                 :            463 :             return TM_Ok;
                               2295                 :                :         }
                               2296                 :                : 
                               2297                 :                :         /*
                               2298                 :                :          * No luck, a retry is needed.  If running MERGE, we do not do so
                               2299                 :                :          * here; instead let it handle that on its own rules.
                               2300                 :                :          */
  728 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     2301         [ +  + ]:             10 :         if (context->mtstate->operation == CMD_MERGE)
  815                          2302                 :              7 :             return result;
                               2303                 :                : 
                               2304                 :                :         /*
                               2305                 :                :          * ExecCrossPartitionUpdate installed an updated version of the new
                               2306                 :                :          * tuple in the retry slot; start over.
                               2307                 :                :          */
 1098                          2308                 :              3 :         slot = retry_slot;
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2309                 :              3 :         goto lreplace;
                               2310                 :                :     }
                               2311                 :                : 
                               2312                 :                :     /*
                               2313                 :                :      * Check the constraints of the tuple.  We've already checked the
                               2314                 :                :      * partition constraint above; however, we must still ensure the tuple
                               2315                 :                :      * passes all other constraints, so we will call ExecConstraints() and
                               2316                 :                :      * have it validate all remaining checks.
                               2317                 :                :      */
                               2318         [ +  + ]:         162974 :     if (resultRelationDesc->rd_att->constr)
                               2319                 :          99492 :         ExecConstraints(resultRelInfo, slot, estate);
                               2320                 :                : 
                               2321                 :                :     /*
                               2322                 :                :      * replace the heap tuple
                               2323                 :                :      *
                               2324                 :                :      * Note: if es_crosscheck_snapshot isn't InvalidSnapshot, we check that
                               2325                 :                :      * the row to be updated is visible to that snapshot, and throw a
                               2326                 :                :      * can't-serialize error if not. This is a special-case behavior needed
                               2327                 :                :      * for referential integrity updates in transaction-snapshot mode
                               2328                 :                :      * transactions.
                               2329                 :                :      */
                               2330                 :         162937 :     result = table_tuple_update(resultRelationDesc, tupleid, slot,
                               2331                 :                :                                 estate->es_output_cid,
                               2332                 :                :                                 estate->es_snapshot,
                               2333                 :                :                                 estate->es_crosscheck_snapshot,
                               2334                 :                :                                 true /* wait for commit */ ,
                               2335                 :                :                                 &context->tmfd, &updateCxt->lockmode,
                               2336                 :                :                                 &updateCxt->updateIndexes);
                               2337                 :                : 
                               2338                 :         162925 :     return result;
                               2339                 :                : }
                               2340                 :                : 
                               2341                 :                : /*
                               2342                 :                :  * ExecUpdateEpilogue -- subroutine for ExecUpdate
                               2343                 :                :  *
                               2344                 :                :  * Closing steps of updating a tuple.  Must be called if ExecUpdateAct
                               2345                 :                :  * returns indicating that the tuple was updated.
                               2346                 :                :  */
                               2347                 :                : static void
                               2348                 :         162939 : ExecUpdateEpilogue(ModifyTableContext *context, UpdateContext *updateCxt,
                               2349                 :                :                    ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo, ItemPointer tupleid,
                               2350                 :                :                    HeapTuple oldtuple, TupleTableSlot *slot)
                               2351                 :                : {
                               2352                 :         162939 :     ModifyTableState *mtstate = context->mtstate;
 1098 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     2353                 :         162939 :     List       *recheckIndexes = NIL;
                               2354                 :                : 
                               2355                 :                :     /* insert index entries for tuple if necessary */
 1091 tomas.vondra@postgre     2356   [ +  +  +  + ]:         162939 :     if (resultRelInfo->ri_NumIndices > 0 && (updateCxt->updateIndexes != TU_None))
                               2357                 :                :     {
   26 alvherre@kurilemu.de     2358                 :GNC       89444 :         bits32      flags = EIIT_IS_UPDATE;
                               2359                 :                : 
                               2360         [ +  + ]:          89444 :         if (updateCxt->updateIndexes == TU_Summarizing)
                               2361                 :           1641 :             flags |= EIIT_ONLY_SUMMARIZING;
                               2362                 :          89444 :         recheckIndexes = ExecInsertIndexTuples(resultRelInfo, context->estate,
                               2363                 :                :                                                flags, slot, NIL,
                               2364                 :                :                                                NULL);
                               2365                 :                :     }
                               2366                 :                : 
                               2367                 :                :     /* AFTER ROW UPDATE Triggers */
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2368                 :CBC      162893 :     ExecARUpdateTriggers(context->estate, resultRelInfo,
                               2369                 :                :                          NULL, NULL,
                               2370                 :                :                          tupleid, oldtuple, slot,
                               2371                 :                :                          recheckIndexes,
                               2372         [ +  + ]:         162893 :                          mtstate->operation == CMD_INSERT ?
                               2373                 :                :                          mtstate->mt_oc_transition_capture :
                               2374                 :                :                          mtstate->mt_transition_capture,
                               2375                 :                :                          false);
                               2376                 :                : 
 1098 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     2377                 :         162891 :     list_free(recheckIndexes);
                               2378                 :                : 
                               2379                 :                :     /*
                               2380                 :                :      * Check any WITH CHECK OPTION constraints from parent views.  We are
                               2381                 :                :      * required to do this after testing all constraints and uniqueness
                               2382                 :                :      * violations per the SQL spec, so we do it after actually updating the
                               2383                 :                :      * record in the heap and all indexes.
                               2384                 :                :      *
                               2385                 :                :      * ExecWithCheckOptions() will skip any WCOs which are not of the kind we
                               2386                 :                :      * are looking for at this point.
                               2387                 :                :      */
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2388         [ +  + ]:         162891 :     if (resultRelInfo->ri_WithCheckOptions != NIL)
                               2389                 :            254 :         ExecWithCheckOptions(WCO_VIEW_CHECK, resultRelInfo,
                               2390                 :                :                              slot, context->estate);
                               2391                 :         162850 : }
                               2392                 :                : 
                               2393                 :                : /*
                               2394                 :                :  * Queues up an update event using the target root partitioned table's
                               2395                 :                :  * trigger to check that a cross-partition update hasn't broken any foreign
                               2396                 :                :  * keys pointing into it.
                               2397                 :                :  */
                               2398                 :                : static void
 1456                          2399                 :            153 : ExecCrossPartitionUpdateForeignKey(ModifyTableContext *context,
                               2400                 :                :                                    ResultRelInfo *sourcePartInfo,
                               2401                 :                :                                    ResultRelInfo *destPartInfo,
                               2402                 :                :                                    ItemPointer tupleid,
                               2403                 :                :                                    TupleTableSlot *oldslot,
                               2404                 :                :                                    TupleTableSlot *newslot)
                               2405                 :                : {
                               2406                 :                :     ListCell   *lc;
                               2407                 :                :     ResultRelInfo *rootRelInfo;
                               2408                 :                :     List       *ancestorRels;
                               2409                 :                : 
                               2410                 :            153 :     rootRelInfo = sourcePartInfo->ri_RootResultRelInfo;
                               2411                 :            153 :     ancestorRels = ExecGetAncestorResultRels(context->estate, sourcePartInfo);
                               2412                 :                : 
                               2413                 :                :     /*
                               2414                 :                :      * For any foreign keys that point directly into a non-root ancestors of
                               2415                 :                :      * the source partition, we can in theory fire an update event to enforce
                               2416                 :                :      * those constraints using their triggers, if we could tell that both the
                               2417                 :                :      * source and the destination partitions are under the same ancestor. But
                               2418                 :                :      * for now, we simply report an error that those cannot be enforced.
                               2419                 :                :      */
                               2420   [ +  -  +  +  :            333 :     foreach(lc, ancestorRels)
                                              +  + ]
                               2421                 :                :     {
                               2422                 :            183 :         ResultRelInfo *rInfo = lfirst(lc);
                               2423                 :            183 :         TriggerDesc *trigdesc = rInfo->ri_TrigDesc;
                               2424                 :            183 :         bool        has_noncloned_fkey = false;
                               2425                 :                : 
                               2426                 :                :         /* Root ancestor's triggers will be processed. */
                               2427         [ +  + ]:            183 :         if (rInfo == rootRelInfo)
                               2428                 :            150 :             continue;
                               2429                 :                : 
                               2430   [ +  -  +  - ]:             33 :         if (trigdesc && trigdesc->trig_update_after_row)
                               2431                 :                :         {
                               2432         [ +  + ]:            114 :             for (int i = 0; i < trigdesc->numtriggers; i++)
                               2433                 :                :             {
                               2434                 :             84 :                 Trigger    *trig = &trigdesc->triggers[i];
                               2435                 :                : 
                               2436   [ +  +  +  - ]:             87 :                 if (!trig->tgisclone &&
                               2437                 :              3 :                     RI_FKey_trigger_type(trig->tgfoid) == RI_TRIGGER_PK)
                               2438                 :                :                 {
                               2439                 :              3 :                     has_noncloned_fkey = true;
                               2440                 :              3 :                     break;
                               2441                 :                :                 }
                               2442                 :                :             }
                               2443                 :                :         }
                               2444                 :                : 
                               2445         [ +  + ]:             33 :         if (has_noncloned_fkey)
                               2446         [ +  - ]:              3 :             ereport(ERROR,
                               2447                 :                :                     (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED),
                               2448                 :                :                      errmsg("cannot move tuple across partitions when a non-root ancestor of the source partition is directly referenced in a foreign key"),
                               2449                 :                :                      errdetail("A foreign key points to ancestor \"%s\" but not the root ancestor \"%s\".",
                               2450                 :                :                                RelationGetRelationName(rInfo->ri_RelationDesc),
                               2451                 :                :                                RelationGetRelationName(rootRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc)),
                               2452                 :                :                      errhint("Consider defining the foreign key on table \"%s\".",
                               2453                 :                :                              RelationGetRelationName(rootRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc))));
                               2454                 :                :     }
                               2455                 :                : 
                               2456                 :                :     /* Perform the root table's triggers. */
                               2457                 :            150 :     ExecARUpdateTriggers(context->estate,
                               2458                 :                :                          rootRelInfo, sourcePartInfo, destPartInfo,
                               2459                 :                :                          tupleid, NULL, newslot, NIL, NULL, true);
                               2460                 :            150 : }
                               2461                 :                : 
                               2462                 :                : /* ----------------------------------------------------------------
                               2463                 :                :  *      ExecUpdate
                               2464                 :                :  *
                               2465                 :                :  *      note: we can't run UPDATE queries with transactions
                               2466                 :                :  *      off because UPDATEs are actually INSERTs and our
                               2467                 :                :  *      scan will mistakenly loop forever, updating the tuple
                               2468                 :                :  *      it just inserted..  This should be fixed but until it
                               2469                 :                :  *      is, we don't want to get stuck in an infinite loop
                               2470                 :                :  *      which corrupts your database..
                               2471                 :                :  *
                               2472                 :                :  *      When updating a table, tupleid identifies the tuple to update and
                               2473                 :                :  *      oldtuple is NULL.  When updating through a view INSTEAD OF trigger,
                               2474                 :                :  *      oldtuple is passed to the triggers and identifies what to update, and
                               2475                 :                :  *      tupleid is invalid.  When updating a foreign table, tupleid is
                               2476                 :                :  *      invalid; the FDW has to figure out which row to update using data from
                               2477                 :                :  *      the planSlot.  oldtuple is passed to foreign table triggers; it is
                               2478                 :                :  *      NULL when the foreign table has no relevant triggers.
                               2479                 :                :  *
                               2480                 :                :  *      oldSlot contains the old tuple value.
                               2481                 :                :  *      slot contains the new tuple value to be stored.
                               2482                 :                :  *      planSlot is the output of the ModifyTable's subplan; we use it
                               2483                 :                :  *      to access values from other input tables (for RETURNING),
                               2484                 :                :  *      row-ID junk columns, etc.
                               2485                 :                :  *
                               2486                 :                :  *      Returns RETURNING result if any, otherwise NULL.  On exit, if tupleid
                               2487                 :                :  *      had identified the tuple to update, it will identify the tuple
                               2488                 :                :  *      actually updated after EvalPlanQual.
                               2489                 :                :  * ----------------------------------------------------------------
                               2490                 :                :  */
                               2491                 :                : static TupleTableSlot *
 1459                          2492                 :         162689 : ExecUpdate(ModifyTableContext *context, ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                               2493                 :                :            ItemPointer tupleid, HeapTuple oldtuple, TupleTableSlot *oldSlot,
                               2494                 :                :            TupleTableSlot *slot, bool canSetTag)
                               2495                 :                : {
                               2496                 :         162689 :     EState     *estate = context->estate;
 1978 heikki.linnakangas@i     2497                 :         162689 :     Relation    resultRelationDesc = resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc;
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2498                 :         162689 :     UpdateContext updateCxt = {0};
                               2499                 :                :     TM_Result   result;
                               2500                 :                : 
                               2501                 :                :     /*
                               2502                 :                :      * abort the operation if not running transactions
                               2503                 :                :      */
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        2504         [ -  + ]:         162689 :     if (IsBootstrapProcessingMode())
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        2505         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :         elog(ERROR, "cannot UPDATE during bootstrap");
                               2506                 :                : 
                               2507                 :                :     /*
                               2508                 :                :      * Prepare for the update.  This includes BEFORE ROW triggers, so we're
                               2509                 :                :      * done if it says we are.
                               2510                 :                :      */
 1098 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     2511         [ +  + ]:CBC      162689 :     if (!ExecUpdatePrologue(context, resultRelInfo, tupleid, oldtuple, slot, NULL))
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2512                 :             66 :         return NULL;
                               2513                 :                : 
                               2514                 :                :     /* INSTEAD OF ROW UPDATE Triggers */
 5635 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        2515         [ +  + ]:         162611 :     if (resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc &&
                               2516         [ +  + ]:           2911 :         resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc->trig_update_instead_row)
                               2517                 :                :     {
 2574 andres@anarazel.de       2518         [ +  + ]:             63 :         if (!ExecIRUpdateTriggers(estate, resultRelInfo,
                               2519                 :                :                                   oldtuple, slot))
 2489 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        2520                 :              9 :             return NULL;        /* "do nothing" */
                               2521                 :                :     }
 4753                          2522         [ +  + ]:         162548 :     else if (resultRelInfo->ri_FdwRoutine)
                               2523                 :                :     {
                               2524                 :                :         /* Fill in GENERATEd columns */
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2525                 :             95 :         ExecUpdatePrepareSlot(resultRelInfo, slot, estate);
                               2526                 :                : 
                               2527                 :                :         /*
                               2528                 :                :          * update in foreign table: let the FDW do it
                               2529                 :                :          */
 4753 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        2530                 :             95 :         slot = resultRelInfo->ri_FdwRoutine->ExecForeignUpdate(estate,
                               2531                 :                :                                                                resultRelInfo,
                               2532                 :                :                                                                slot,
                               2533                 :                :                                                                context->planSlot);
                               2534                 :                : 
                               2535         [ +  + ]:             95 :         if (slot == NULL)       /* "do nothing" */
                               2536                 :              1 :             return NULL;
                               2537                 :                : 
                               2538                 :                :         /*
                               2539                 :                :          * AFTER ROW Triggers or RETURNING expressions might reference the
                               2540                 :                :          * tableoid column, so (re-)initialize tts_tableOid before evaluating
                               2541                 :                :          * them.  (This covers the case where the FDW replaced the slot.)
                               2542                 :                :          */
 2574 andres@anarazel.de       2543                 :             94 :         slot->tts_tableOid = RelationGetRelid(resultRelationDesc);
                               2544                 :                :     }
                               2545                 :                :     else
                               2546                 :                :     {
                               2547                 :                :         ItemPointerData lockedtid;
                               2548                 :                : 
                               2549                 :                :         /*
                               2550                 :                :          * If we generate a new candidate tuple after EvalPlanQual testing, we
                               2551                 :                :          * must loop back here to try again.  (We don't need to redo triggers,
                               2552                 :                :          * however.  If there are any BEFORE triggers then trigger.c will have
                               2553                 :                :          * done table_tuple_lock to lock the correct tuple, so there's no need
                               2554                 :                :          * to do them again.)
                               2555                 :                :          */
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2556                 :         162453 : redo_act:
  537 noah@leadboat.com        2557                 :         162509 :         lockedtid = *tupleid;
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2558                 :         162509 :         result = ExecUpdateAct(context, resultRelInfo, tupleid, oldtuple, slot,
                               2559                 :                :                                canSetTag, &updateCxt);
                               2560                 :                : 
                               2561                 :                :         /*
                               2562                 :                :          * If ExecUpdateAct reports that a cross-partition update was done,
                               2563                 :                :          * then the RETURNING tuple (if any) has been projected and there's
                               2564                 :                :          * nothing else for us to do.
                               2565                 :                :          */
                               2566         [ +  + ]:         162351 :         if (updateCxt.crossPartUpdate)
                               2567                 :            453 :             return context->cpUpdateReturningSlot;
                               2568                 :                : 
 5635 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        2569   [ +  +  +  +  :         161964 :         switch (result)
                                                 - ]
                               2570                 :                :         {
 2549 andres@anarazel.de       2571                 :             42 :             case TM_SelfModified:
                               2572                 :                : 
                               2573                 :                :                 /*
                               2574                 :                :                  * The target tuple was already updated or deleted by the
                               2575                 :                :                  * current command, or by a later command in the current
                               2576                 :                :                  * transaction.  The former case is possible in a join UPDATE
                               2577                 :                :                  * where multiple tuples join to the same target tuple. This
                               2578                 :                :                  * is pretty questionable, but Postgres has always allowed it:
                               2579                 :                :                  * we just execute the first update action and ignore
                               2580                 :                :                  * additional update attempts.
                               2581                 :                :                  *
                               2582                 :                :                  * The latter case arises if the tuple is modified by a
                               2583                 :                :                  * command in a BEFORE trigger, or perhaps by a command in a
                               2584                 :                :                  * volatile function used in the query.  In such situations we
                               2585                 :                :                  * should not ignore the update, but it is equally unsafe to
                               2586                 :                :                  * proceed.  We don't want to discard the original UPDATE
                               2587                 :                :                  * while keeping the triggered actions based on it; and we
                               2588                 :                :                  * have no principled way to merge this update with the
                               2589                 :                :                  * previous ones.  So throwing an error is the only safe
                               2590                 :                :                  * course.
                               2591                 :                :                  *
                               2592                 :                :                  * If a trigger actually intends this type of interaction, it
                               2593                 :                :                  * can re-execute the UPDATE (assuming it can figure out how)
                               2594                 :                :                  * and then return NULL to cancel the outer update.
                               2595                 :                :                  */
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2596         [ +  + ]:             42 :                 if (context->tmfd.cmax != estate->es_output_cid)
 4888 kgrittn@postgresql.o     2597         [ +  - ]:              3 :                     ereport(ERROR,
                               2598                 :                :                             (errcode(ERRCODE_TRIGGERED_DATA_CHANGE_VIOLATION),
                               2599                 :                :                              errmsg("tuple to be updated was already modified by an operation triggered by the current command"),
                               2600                 :                :                              errhint("Consider using an AFTER trigger instead of a BEFORE trigger to propagate changes to other rows.")));
                               2601                 :                : 
                               2602                 :                :                 /* Else, already updated by self; nothing to do */
 5635 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        2603                 :             39 :                 return NULL;
                               2604                 :                : 
 2549 andres@anarazel.de       2605                 :         161834 :             case TM_Ok:
 5635 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        2606                 :         161834 :                 break;
                               2607                 :                : 
 2549 andres@anarazel.de       2608                 :             84 :             case TM_Updated:
                               2609                 :                :                 {
                               2610                 :                :                     TupleTableSlot *inputslot;
                               2611                 :                :                     TupleTableSlot *epqslot;
                               2612                 :                : 
                               2613         [ +  + ]:             84 :                     if (IsolationUsesXactSnapshot())
                               2614         [ +  - ]:              2 :                         ereport(ERROR,
                               2615                 :                :                                 (errcode(ERRCODE_T_R_SERIALIZATION_FAILURE),
                               2616                 :                :                                  errmsg("could not serialize access due to concurrent update")));
                               2617                 :                : 
                               2618                 :                :                     /*
                               2619                 :                :                      * Already know that we're going to need to do EPQ, so
                               2620                 :                :                      * fetch tuple directly into the right slot.
                               2621                 :                :                      */
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     2622                 :             82 :                     inputslot = EvalPlanQualSlot(context->epqstate, resultRelationDesc,
                               2623                 :                :                                                  resultRelInfo->ri_RangeTableIndex);
                               2624                 :                : 
                               2625                 :             82 :                     result = table_tuple_lock(resultRelationDesc, tupleid,
                               2626                 :                :                                               estate->es_snapshot,
                               2627                 :                :                                               inputslot, estate->es_output_cid,
                               2628                 :                :                                               updateCxt.lockmode, LockWaitBlock,
                               2629                 :                :                                               TUPLE_LOCK_FLAG_FIND_LAST_VERSION,
                               2630                 :                :                                               &context->tmfd);
                               2631                 :                : 
                               2632   [ +  +  +  - ]:             80 :                     switch (result)
                               2633                 :                :                     {
                               2634                 :             75 :                         case TM_Ok:
                               2635         [ -  + ]:             75 :                             Assert(context->tmfd.traversed);
                               2636                 :                : 
                               2637                 :             75 :                             epqslot = EvalPlanQual(context->epqstate,
                               2638                 :                :                                                    resultRelationDesc,
                               2639                 :                :                                                    resultRelInfo->ri_RangeTableIndex,
                               2640                 :                :                                                    inputslot);
                               2641   [ +  +  +  + ]:             75 :                             if (TupIsNull(epqslot))
                               2642                 :                :                                 /* Tuple not passing quals anymore, exiting... */
                               2643                 :             19 :                                 return NULL;
                               2644                 :                : 
                               2645                 :                :                             /* Make sure ri_oldTupleSlot is initialized. */
                               2646         [ -  + ]:             56 :                             if (unlikely(!resultRelInfo->ri_projectNewInfoValid))
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     2647                 :UBC           0 :                                 ExecInitUpdateProjection(context->mtstate,
                               2648                 :                :                                                          resultRelInfo);
                               2649                 :                : 
  537 noah@leadboat.com        2650         [ +  + ]:CBC          56 :                             if (resultRelInfo->ri_needLockTagTuple)
                               2651                 :                :                             {
                               2652                 :              1 :                                 UnlockTuple(resultRelationDesc,
                               2653                 :                :                                             &lockedtid, InplaceUpdateTupleLock);
                               2654                 :              1 :                                 LockTuple(resultRelationDesc,
                               2655                 :                :                                           tupleid, InplaceUpdateTupleLock);
                               2656                 :                :                             }
                               2657                 :                : 
                               2658                 :                :                             /* Fetch the most recent version of old tuple. */
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     2659                 :             56 :                             oldSlot = resultRelInfo->ri_oldTupleSlot;
                               2660         [ -  + ]:             56 :                             if (!table_tuple_fetch_row_version(resultRelationDesc,
                               2661                 :                :                                                                tupleid,
                               2662                 :                :                                                                SnapshotAny,
                               2663                 :                :                                                                oldSlot))
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     2664         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                                 elog(ERROR, "failed to fetch tuple being updated");
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     2665                 :CBC          56 :                             slot = ExecGetUpdateNewTuple(resultRelInfo,
                               2666                 :                :                                                          epqslot, oldSlot);
                               2667                 :             56 :                             goto redo_act;
                               2668                 :                : 
                               2669                 :              1 :                         case TM_Deleted:
                               2670                 :                :                             /* tuple already deleted; nothing to do */
                               2671                 :              1 :                             return NULL;
                               2672                 :                : 
                               2673                 :              4 :                         case TM_SelfModified:
                               2674                 :                : 
                               2675                 :                :                             /*
                               2676                 :                :                              * This can be reached when following an update
                               2677                 :                :                              * chain from a tuple updated by another session,
                               2678                 :                :                              * reaching a tuple that was already updated in
                               2679                 :                :                              * this transaction. If previously modified by
                               2680                 :                :                              * this command, ignore the redundant update,
                               2681                 :                :                              * otherwise error out.
                               2682                 :                :                              *
                               2683                 :                :                              * See also TM_SelfModified response to
                               2684                 :                :                              * table_tuple_update() above.
                               2685                 :                :                              */
                               2686         [ +  + ]:              4 :                             if (context->tmfd.cmax != estate->es_output_cid)
                               2687         [ +  - ]:              1 :                                 ereport(ERROR,
                               2688                 :                :                                         (errcode(ERRCODE_TRIGGERED_DATA_CHANGE_VIOLATION),
                               2689                 :                :                                          errmsg("tuple to be updated was already modified by an operation triggered by the current command"),
                               2690                 :                :                                          errhint("Consider using an AFTER trigger instead of a BEFORE trigger to propagate changes to other rows.")));
                               2691                 :              3 :                             return NULL;
                               2692                 :                : 
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     2693                 :UBC           0 :                         default:
                               2694                 :                :                             /* see table_tuple_lock call in ExecDelete() */
                               2695         [ #  # ]:              0 :                             elog(ERROR, "unexpected table_tuple_lock status: %u",
                               2696                 :                :                                  result);
                               2697                 :                :                             return NULL;
                               2698                 :                :                     }
                               2699                 :                :                 }
                               2700                 :                : 
                               2701                 :                :                 break;
                               2702                 :                : 
 2549 andres@anarazel.de       2703                 :CBC           4 :             case TM_Deleted:
                               2704         [ -  + ]:              4 :                 if (IsolationUsesXactSnapshot())
 2549 andres@anarazel.de       2705         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                     ereport(ERROR,
                               2706                 :                :                             (errcode(ERRCODE_T_R_SERIALIZATION_FAILURE),
                               2707                 :                :                              errmsg("could not serialize access due to concurrent delete")));
                               2708                 :                :                 /* tuple already deleted; nothing to do */
 5635 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        2709                 :CBC           4 :                 return NULL;
                               2710                 :                : 
 5635 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        2711                 :UBC           0 :             default:
 2488 andres@anarazel.de       2712         [ #  # ]:              0 :                 elog(ERROR, "unrecognized table_tuple_update status: %u",
                               2713                 :                :                      result);
                               2714                 :                :                 return NULL;
                               2715                 :                :         }
                               2716                 :                :     }
                               2717                 :                : 
 5497 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        2718         [ +  + ]:CBC      161976 :     if (canSetTag)
                               2719                 :         161667 :         (estate->es_processed)++;
                               2720                 :                : 
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2721                 :         161976 :     ExecUpdateEpilogue(context, &updateCxt, resultRelInfo, tupleid, oldtuple,
                               2722                 :                :                        slot);
                               2723                 :                : 
                               2724                 :                :     /* Process RETURNING if present */
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        2725         [ +  + ]:         161893 :     if (resultRelInfo->ri_projectReturning)
   31 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     2726                 :GNC        1214 :         return ExecProcessReturning(context, resultRelInfo, false,
                               2727                 :                :                                     oldSlot, slot, context->planSlot);
                               2728                 :                : 
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        2729                 :CBC      160679 :     return NULL;
                               2730                 :                : }
                               2731                 :                : 
                               2732                 :                : /*
                               2733                 :                :  * ExecOnConflictLockRow --- lock the row for ON CONFLICT DO SELECT/UPDATE
                               2734                 :                :  *
                               2735                 :                :  * Try to lock tuple for update as part of speculative insertion for ON
                               2736                 :                :  * CONFLICT DO UPDATE or ON CONFLICT DO SELECT FOR UPDATE/SHARE.
                               2737                 :                :  *
                               2738                 :                :  * Returns true if the row is successfully locked, or false if the caller must
                               2739                 :                :  * retry the INSERT from scratch.
                               2740                 :                :  */
                               2741                 :                : static bool
   31 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     2742                 :GNC        2681 : ExecOnConflictLockRow(ModifyTableContext *context,
                               2743                 :                :                       TupleTableSlot *existing,
                               2744                 :                :                       ItemPointer conflictTid,
                               2745                 :                :                       Relation relation,
                               2746                 :                :                       LockTupleMode lockmode,
                               2747                 :                :                       bool isUpdate)
                               2748                 :                : {
                               2749                 :                :     TM_FailureData tmfd;
                               2750                 :                :     TM_Result   test;
                               2751                 :                :     Datum       xminDatum;
                               2752                 :                :     TransactionId xmin;
                               2753                 :                :     bool        isnull;
                               2754                 :                : 
                               2755                 :                :     /*
                               2756                 :                :      * Lock tuple with lockmode.  Don't follow updates when tuple cannot be
                               2757                 :                :      * locked without doing so.  A row locking conflict here means our
                               2758                 :                :      * previous conclusion that the tuple is conclusively committed is not
                               2759                 :                :      * true anymore.
                               2760                 :                :      */
 2488 andres@anarazel.de       2761                 :CBC        2681 :     test = table_tuple_lock(relation, conflictTid,
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2762                 :           2681 :                             context->estate->es_snapshot,
                               2763                 :           2681 :                             existing, context->estate->es_output_cid,
                               2764                 :                :                             lockmode, LockWaitBlock, 0,
                               2765                 :                :                             &tmfd);
 3964 andres@anarazel.de       2766   [ +  +  -  +  :           2681 :     switch (test)
                                              +  - ]
                               2767                 :                :     {
 2549                          2768                 :           2657 :         case TM_Ok:
                               2769                 :                :             /* success! */
 3964                          2770                 :           2657 :             break;
                               2771                 :                : 
 2549                          2772                 :             21 :         case TM_Invisible:
                               2773                 :                : 
                               2774                 :                :             /*
                               2775                 :                :              * This can occur when a just inserted tuple is updated again in
                               2776                 :                :              * the same command. E.g. because multiple rows with the same
                               2777                 :                :              * conflicting key values are inserted.
                               2778                 :                :              *
                               2779                 :                :              * This is somewhat similar to the ExecUpdate() TM_SelfModified
                               2780                 :                :              * case.  We do not want to proceed because it would lead to the
                               2781                 :                :              * same row being updated a second time in some unspecified order,
                               2782                 :                :              * and in contrast to plain UPDATEs there's no historical behavior
                               2783                 :                :              * to break.
                               2784                 :                :              *
                               2785                 :                :              * It is the user's responsibility to prevent this situation from
                               2786                 :                :              * occurring.  These problems are why the SQL standard similarly
                               2787                 :                :              * specifies that for SQL MERGE, an exception must be raised in
                               2788                 :                :              * the event of an attempt to update the same row twice.
                               2789                 :                :              */
                               2790                 :             21 :             xminDatum = slot_getsysattr(existing,
                               2791                 :                :                                         MinTransactionIdAttributeNumber,
                               2792                 :                :                                         &isnull);
                               2793         [ -  + ]:             21 :             Assert(!isnull);
                               2794                 :             21 :             xmin = DatumGetTransactionId(xminDatum);
                               2795                 :                : 
                               2796         [ +  - ]:             21 :             if (TransactionIdIsCurrentTransactionId(xmin))
 3964                          2797   [ +  -  +  + ]:             21 :                 ereport(ERROR,
                               2798                 :                :                         (errcode(ERRCODE_CARDINALITY_VIOLATION),
                               2799                 :                :                 /* translator: %s is a SQL command name */
                               2800                 :                :                          errmsg("%s command cannot affect row a second time",
                               2801                 :                :                                 isUpdate ? "ON CONFLICT DO UPDATE" : "ON CONFLICT DO SELECT"),
                               2802                 :                :                          errhint("Ensure that no rows proposed for insertion within the same command have duplicate constrained values.")));
                               2803                 :                : 
                               2804                 :                :             /* This shouldn't happen */
 3964 andres@anarazel.de       2805         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :             elog(ERROR, "attempted to lock invisible tuple");
                               2806                 :                :             break;
                               2807                 :                : 
 2549                          2808                 :              0 :         case TM_SelfModified:
                               2809                 :                : 
                               2810                 :                :             /*
                               2811                 :                :              * This state should never be reached. As a dirty snapshot is used
                               2812                 :                :              * to find conflicting tuples, speculative insertion wouldn't have
                               2813                 :                :              * seen this row to conflict with.
                               2814                 :                :              */
 3964                          2815         [ #  # ]:              0 :             elog(ERROR, "unexpected self-updated tuple");
                               2816                 :                :             break;
                               2817                 :                : 
 2549 andres@anarazel.de       2818                 :CBC           2 :         case TM_Updated:
 3964                          2819         [ -  + ]:              2 :             if (IsolationUsesXactSnapshot())
 3964 andres@anarazel.de       2820         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                 ereport(ERROR,
                               2821                 :                :                         (errcode(ERRCODE_T_R_SERIALIZATION_FAILURE),
                               2822                 :                :                          errmsg("could not serialize access due to concurrent update")));
                               2823                 :                : 
                               2824                 :                :             /*
                               2825                 :                :              * Tell caller to try again from the very start.
                               2826                 :                :              *
                               2827                 :                :              * It does not make sense to use the usual EvalPlanQual() style
                               2828                 :                :              * loop here, as the new version of the row might not conflict
                               2829                 :                :              * anymore, or the conflicting tuple has actually been deleted.
                               2830                 :                :              */
 2549 andres@anarazel.de       2831                 :CBC           2 :             ExecClearTuple(existing);
                               2832                 :              2 :             return false;
                               2833                 :                : 
                               2834                 :              1 :         case TM_Deleted:
                               2835         [ -  + ]:              1 :             if (IsolationUsesXactSnapshot())
 2549 andres@anarazel.de       2836         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                 ereport(ERROR,
                               2837                 :                :                         (errcode(ERRCODE_T_R_SERIALIZATION_FAILURE),
                               2838                 :                :                          errmsg("could not serialize access due to concurrent delete")));
                               2839                 :                : 
                               2840                 :                :             /* see TM_Updated case */
 2549 andres@anarazel.de       2841                 :CBC           1 :             ExecClearTuple(existing);
 3964                          2842                 :              1 :             return false;
                               2843                 :                : 
 3964 andres@anarazel.de       2844                 :UBC           0 :         default:
 2488                          2845         [ #  # ]:              0 :             elog(ERROR, "unrecognized table_tuple_lock status: %u", test);
                               2846                 :                :     }
                               2847                 :                : 
                               2848                 :                :     /* Success, the tuple is locked. */
   31 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     2849                 :GNC        2657 :     return true;
                               2850                 :                : }
                               2851                 :                : 
                               2852                 :                : /*
                               2853                 :                :  * ExecOnConflictUpdate --- execute UPDATE of INSERT ON CONFLICT DO UPDATE
                               2854                 :                :  *
                               2855                 :                :  * Try to lock tuple for update as part of speculative insertion.  If
                               2856                 :                :  * a qual originating from ON CONFLICT DO UPDATE is satisfied, update
                               2857                 :                :  * (but still lock row, even though it may not satisfy estate's
                               2858                 :                :  * snapshot).
                               2859                 :                :  *
                               2860                 :                :  * Returns true if we're done (with or without an update), or false if
                               2861                 :                :  * the caller must retry the INSERT from scratch.
                               2862                 :                :  */
                               2863                 :                : static bool
                               2864                 :           2626 : ExecOnConflictUpdate(ModifyTableContext *context,
                               2865                 :                :                      ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                               2866                 :                :                      ItemPointer conflictTid,
                               2867                 :                :                      TupleTableSlot *excludedSlot,
                               2868                 :                :                      bool canSetTag,
                               2869                 :                :                      TupleTableSlot **returning)
                               2870                 :                : {
                               2871                 :           2626 :     ModifyTableState *mtstate = context->mtstate;
                               2872                 :           2626 :     ExprContext *econtext = mtstate->ps.ps_ExprContext;
                               2873                 :           2626 :     Relation    relation = resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc;
                               2874                 :           2626 :     ExprState  *onConflictSetWhere = resultRelInfo->ri_onConflict->oc_WhereClause;
                               2875                 :           2626 :     TupleTableSlot *existing = resultRelInfo->ri_onConflict->oc_Existing;
                               2876                 :                :     LockTupleMode lockmode;
                               2877                 :                : 
                               2878                 :                :     /*
                               2879                 :                :      * Parse analysis should have blocked ON CONFLICT for all system
                               2880                 :                :      * relations, which includes these.  There's no fundamental obstacle to
                               2881                 :                :      * supporting this; we'd just need to handle LOCKTAG_TUPLE like the other
                               2882                 :                :      * ExecUpdate() caller.
                               2883                 :                :      */
                               2884         [ -  + ]:           2626 :     Assert(!resultRelInfo->ri_needLockTagTuple);
                               2885                 :                : 
                               2886                 :                :     /* Determine lock mode to use */
                               2887                 :           2626 :     lockmode = ExecUpdateLockMode(context->estate, resultRelInfo);
                               2888                 :                : 
                               2889                 :                :     /* Lock tuple for update */
                               2890         [ +  + ]:           2626 :     if (!ExecOnConflictLockRow(context, existing, conflictTid,
                               2891                 :                :                                resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc, lockmode, true))
                               2892                 :              3 :         return false;
                               2893                 :                : 
                               2894                 :                :     /*
                               2895                 :                :      * Verify that the tuple is visible to our MVCC snapshot if the current
                               2896                 :                :      * isolation level mandates that.
                               2897                 :                :      *
                               2898                 :                :      * It's not sufficient to rely on the check within ExecUpdate() as e.g.
                               2899                 :                :      * CONFLICT ... WHERE clause may prevent us from reaching that.
                               2900                 :                :      *
                               2901                 :                :      * This means we only ever continue when a new command in the current
                               2902                 :                :      * transaction could see the row, even though in READ COMMITTED mode the
                               2903                 :                :      * tuple will not be visible according to the current statement's
                               2904                 :                :      * snapshot.  This is in line with the way UPDATE deals with newer tuple
                               2905                 :                :      * versions.
                               2906                 :                :      */
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2907                 :CBC        2611 :     ExecCheckTupleVisible(context->estate, relation, existing);
                               2908                 :                : 
                               2909                 :                :     /*
                               2910                 :                :      * Make tuple and any needed join variables available to ExecQual and
                               2911                 :                :      * ExecProject.  The EXCLUDED tuple is installed in ecxt_innertuple, while
                               2912                 :                :      * the target's existing tuple is installed in the scantuple.  EXCLUDED
                               2913                 :                :      * has been made to reference INNER_VAR in setrefs.c, but there is no
                               2914                 :                :      * other redirection.
                               2915                 :                :      */
 2566 andres@anarazel.de       2916                 :           2611 :     econtext->ecxt_scantuple = existing;
 3964                          2917                 :           2611 :     econtext->ecxt_innertuple = excludedSlot;
                               2918                 :           2611 :     econtext->ecxt_outertuple = NULL;
                               2919                 :                : 
 3288                          2920         [ +  + ]:           2611 :     if (!ExecQual(onConflictSetWhere, econtext))
                               2921                 :                :     {
 2566                          2922                 :             16 :         ExecClearTuple(existing);   /* see return below */
 3964                          2923         [ -  + ]:             16 :         InstrCountFiltered1(&mtstate->ps, 1);
                               2924                 :             16 :         return true;            /* done with the tuple */
                               2925                 :                :     }
                               2926                 :                : 
                               2927         [ +  + ]:           2595 :     if (resultRelInfo->ri_WithCheckOptions != NIL)
                               2928                 :                :     {
                               2929                 :                :         /*
                               2930                 :                :          * Check target's existing tuple against UPDATE-applicable USING
                               2931                 :                :          * security barrier quals (if any), enforced here as RLS checks/WCOs.
                               2932                 :                :          *
                               2933                 :                :          * The rewriter creates UPDATE RLS checks/WCOs for UPDATE security
                               2934                 :                :          * quals, and stores them as WCOs of "kind" WCO_RLS_CONFLICT_CHECK.
                               2935                 :                :          * Since SELECT permission on the target table is always required for
                               2936                 :                :          * INSERT ... ON CONFLICT DO UPDATE, the rewriter also adds SELECT RLS
                               2937                 :                :          * checks/WCOs for SELECT security quals, using WCOs of the same kind,
                               2938                 :                :          * and this check enforces them too.
                               2939                 :                :          *
                               2940                 :                :          * The rewriter will also have associated UPDATE-applicable straight
                               2941                 :                :          * RLS checks/WCOs for the benefit of the ExecUpdate() call that
                               2942                 :                :          * follows.  INSERTs and UPDATEs naturally have mutually exclusive WCO
                               2943                 :                :          * kinds, so there is no danger of spurious over-enforcement in the
                               2944                 :                :          * INSERT or UPDATE path.
                               2945                 :                :          */
                               2946                 :             36 :         ExecWithCheckOptions(WCO_RLS_CONFLICT_CHECK, resultRelInfo,
                               2947                 :                :                              existing,
                               2948                 :                :                              mtstate->ps.state);
                               2949                 :                :     }
                               2950                 :                : 
                               2951                 :                :     /* Project the new tuple version */
 2911 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     2952                 :           2583 :     ExecProject(resultRelInfo->ri_onConflict->oc_ProjInfo);
                               2953                 :                : 
                               2954                 :                :     /*
                               2955                 :                :      * Note that it is possible that the target tuple has been modified in
                               2956                 :                :      * this session, after the above table_tuple_lock. We choose to not error
                               2957                 :                :      * out in that case, in line with ExecUpdate's treatment of similar cases.
                               2958                 :                :      * This can happen if an UPDATE is triggered from within ExecQual(),
                               2959                 :                :      * ExecWithCheckOptions() or ExecProject() above, e.g. by selecting from a
                               2960                 :                :      * wCTE in the ON CONFLICT's SET.
                               2961                 :                :      */
                               2962                 :                : 
                               2963                 :                :     /* Execute UPDATE with projection */
 1459                          2964                 :           5151 :     *returning = ExecUpdate(context, resultRelInfo,
                               2965                 :                :                             conflictTid, NULL, existing,
 2566 andres@anarazel.de       2966                 :           2583 :                             resultRelInfo->ri_onConflict->oc_ProjSlot,
                               2967                 :                :                             canSetTag);
                               2968                 :                : 
                               2969                 :                :     /*
                               2970                 :                :      * Clear out existing tuple, as there might not be another conflict among
                               2971                 :                :      * the next input rows. Don't want to hold resources till the end of the
                               2972                 :                :      * query.  First though, make sure that the returning slot, if any, has a
                               2973                 :                :      * local copy of any OLD pass-by-reference values, if it refers to any OLD
                               2974                 :                :      * columns.
                               2975                 :                :      */
  423 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     2976         [ +  + ]:           2568 :     if (*returning != NULL &&
                               2977         [ +  + ]:            117 :         resultRelInfo->ri_projectReturning->pi_state.flags & EEO_FLAG_HAS_OLD)
                               2978                 :              6 :         ExecMaterializeSlot(*returning);
                               2979                 :                : 
 2566 andres@anarazel.de       2980                 :           2568 :     ExecClearTuple(existing);
                               2981                 :                : 
 3964                          2982                 :           2568 :     return true;
                               2983                 :                : }
                               2984                 :                : 
                               2985                 :                : /*
                               2986                 :                :  * ExecOnConflictSelect --- execute SELECT of INSERT ON CONFLICT DO SELECT
                               2987                 :                :  *
                               2988                 :                :  * If SELECT FOR UPDATE/SHARE is specified, try to lock tuple as part of
                               2989                 :                :  * speculative insertion.  If a qual originating from ON CONFLICT DO SELECT is
                               2990                 :                :  * satisfied, select (but still lock row, even though it may not satisfy
                               2991                 :                :  * estate's snapshot).
                               2992                 :                :  *
                               2993                 :                :  * Returns true if we're done (with or without a select), or false if the
                               2994                 :                :  * caller must retry the INSERT from scratch.
                               2995                 :                :  */
                               2996                 :                : static bool
   31 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     2997                 :GNC         147 : ExecOnConflictSelect(ModifyTableContext *context,
                               2998                 :                :                      ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                               2999                 :                :                      ItemPointer conflictTid,
                               3000                 :                :                      TupleTableSlot *excludedSlot,
                               3001                 :                :                      bool canSetTag,
                               3002                 :                :                      TupleTableSlot **returning)
                               3003                 :                : {
                               3004                 :            147 :     ModifyTableState *mtstate = context->mtstate;
                               3005                 :            147 :     ExprContext *econtext = mtstate->ps.ps_ExprContext;
                               3006                 :            147 :     Relation    relation = resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc;
                               3007                 :            147 :     ExprState  *onConflictSelectWhere = resultRelInfo->ri_onConflict->oc_WhereClause;
                               3008                 :            147 :     TupleTableSlot *existing = resultRelInfo->ri_onConflict->oc_Existing;
                               3009                 :            147 :     LockClauseStrength lockStrength = resultRelInfo->ri_onConflict->oc_LockStrength;
                               3010                 :                : 
                               3011                 :                :     /*
                               3012                 :                :      * Parse analysis should have blocked ON CONFLICT for all system
                               3013                 :                :      * relations, which includes these.  There's no fundamental obstacle to
                               3014                 :                :      * supporting this; we'd just need to handle LOCKTAG_TUPLE appropriately.
                               3015                 :                :      */
                               3016         [ -  + ]:            147 :     Assert(!resultRelInfo->ri_needLockTagTuple);
                               3017                 :                : 
                               3018                 :                :     /* Fetch/lock existing tuple, according to the requested lock strength */
                               3019         [ +  + ]:            147 :     if (lockStrength == LCS_NONE)
                               3020                 :                :     {
                               3021         [ -  + ]:             92 :         if (!table_tuple_fetch_row_version(relation,
                               3022                 :                :                                            conflictTid,
                               3023                 :                :                                            SnapshotAny,
                               3024                 :                :                                            existing))
   31 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3025         [ #  # ]:UNC           0 :             elog(ERROR, "failed to fetch conflicting tuple for ON CONFLICT");
                               3026                 :                :     }
                               3027                 :                :     else
                               3028                 :                :     {
                               3029                 :                :         LockTupleMode lockmode;
                               3030                 :                : 
   31 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3031   [ +  +  +  +  :GNC          55 :         switch (lockStrength)
                                                 - ]
                               3032                 :                :         {
                               3033                 :              1 :             case LCS_FORKEYSHARE:
                               3034                 :              1 :                 lockmode = LockTupleKeyShare;
                               3035                 :              1 :                 break;
                               3036                 :              1 :             case LCS_FORSHARE:
                               3037                 :              1 :                 lockmode = LockTupleShare;
                               3038                 :              1 :                 break;
                               3039                 :              1 :             case LCS_FORNOKEYUPDATE:
                               3040                 :              1 :                 lockmode = LockTupleNoKeyExclusive;
                               3041                 :              1 :                 break;
                               3042                 :             52 :             case LCS_FORUPDATE:
                               3043                 :             52 :                 lockmode = LockTupleExclusive;
                               3044                 :             52 :                 break;
   31 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3045                 :UNC           0 :             default:
                               3046         [ #  # ]:              0 :                 elog(ERROR, "Unexpected lock strength %d", (int) lockStrength);
                               3047                 :                :         }
                               3048                 :                : 
   31 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3049         [ -  + ]:GNC          55 :         if (!ExecOnConflictLockRow(context, existing, conflictTid,
                               3050                 :                :                                    resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc, lockmode, false))
   31 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3051                 :UNC           0 :             return false;
                               3052                 :                :     }
                               3053                 :                : 
                               3054                 :                :     /*
                               3055                 :                :      * Verify that the tuple is visible to our MVCC snapshot if the current
                               3056                 :                :      * isolation level mandates that.  See comments in ExecOnConflictUpdate().
                               3057                 :                :      */
   31 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3058                 :GNC         138 :     ExecCheckTupleVisible(context->estate, relation, existing);
                               3059                 :                : 
                               3060                 :                :     /*
                               3061                 :                :      * Make tuple and any needed join variables available to ExecQual.  The
                               3062                 :                :      * EXCLUDED tuple is installed in ecxt_innertuple, while the target's
                               3063                 :                :      * existing tuple is installed in the scantuple.  EXCLUDED has been made
                               3064                 :                :      * to reference INNER_VAR in setrefs.c, but there is no other redirection.
                               3065                 :                :      */
                               3066                 :            138 :     econtext->ecxt_scantuple = existing;
                               3067                 :            138 :     econtext->ecxt_innertuple = excludedSlot;
                               3068                 :            138 :     econtext->ecxt_outertuple = NULL;
                               3069                 :                : 
                               3070         [ +  + ]:            138 :     if (!ExecQual(onConflictSelectWhere, econtext))
                               3071                 :                :     {
                               3072                 :             18 :         ExecClearTuple(existing);   /* see return below */
                               3073         [ -  + ]:             18 :         InstrCountFiltered1(&mtstate->ps, 1);
                               3074                 :             18 :         return true;            /* done with the tuple */
                               3075                 :                :     }
                               3076                 :                : 
                               3077         [ +  + ]:            120 :     if (resultRelInfo->ri_WithCheckOptions != NIL)
                               3078                 :                :     {
                               3079                 :                :         /*
                               3080                 :                :          * Check target's existing tuple against SELECT-applicable USING
                               3081                 :                :          * security barrier quals (if any), enforced here as RLS checks/WCOs.
                               3082                 :                :          *
                               3083                 :                :          * The rewriter creates WCOs from the USING quals of SELECT policies,
                               3084                 :                :          * and stores them as WCOs of "kind" WCO_RLS_CONFLICT_CHECK.  If FOR
                               3085                 :                :          * UPDATE/SHARE was specified, UPDATE permissions are required on the
                               3086                 :                :          * target table, and the rewriter also adds WCOs built from the USING
                               3087                 :                :          * quals of UPDATE policies, using WCOs of the same kind, and this
                               3088                 :                :          * check enforces them too.
                               3089                 :                :          */
                               3090                 :             18 :         ExecWithCheckOptions(WCO_RLS_CONFLICT_CHECK, resultRelInfo,
                               3091                 :                :                              existing,
                               3092                 :                :                              mtstate->ps.state);
                               3093                 :                :     }
                               3094                 :                : 
                               3095                 :                :     /* RETURNING is required for DO SELECT */
                               3096         [ -  + ]:            117 :     Assert(resultRelInfo->ri_projectReturning);
                               3097                 :                : 
                               3098                 :            117 :     *returning = ExecProcessReturning(context, resultRelInfo, false,
                               3099                 :                :                                       existing, existing, context->planSlot);
                               3100                 :                : 
                               3101         [ +  - ]:            117 :     if (canSetTag)
                               3102                 :            117 :         context->estate->es_processed++;
                               3103                 :                : 
                               3104                 :                :     /*
                               3105                 :                :      * Before releasing the existing tuple, make sure that the returning slot
                               3106                 :                :      * has a local copy of any pass-by-reference values.
                               3107                 :                :      */
                               3108                 :            117 :     ExecMaterializeSlot(*returning);
                               3109                 :                : 
                               3110                 :                :     /*
                               3111                 :                :      * Clear out existing tuple, as there might not be another conflict among
                               3112                 :                :      * the next input rows. Don't want to hold resources till the end of the
                               3113                 :                :      * query.
                               3114                 :                :      */
                               3115                 :            117 :     ExecClearTuple(existing);
                               3116                 :                : 
                               3117                 :            117 :     return true;
                               3118                 :                : }
                               3119                 :                : 
                               3120                 :                : /*
                               3121                 :                :  * Perform MERGE.
                               3122                 :                :  */
                               3123                 :                : static TupleTableSlot *
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3124                 :CBC        7770 : ExecMerge(ModifyTableContext *context, ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                               3125                 :                :           ItemPointer tupleid, HeapTuple oldtuple, bool canSetTag)
                               3126                 :                : {
  728 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3127                 :           7770 :     TupleTableSlot *rslot = NULL;
                               3128                 :                :     bool        matched;
                               3129                 :                : 
                               3130                 :                :     /*-----
                               3131                 :                :      * If we are dealing with a WHEN MATCHED case, tupleid or oldtuple is
                               3132                 :                :      * valid, depending on whether the result relation is a table or a view.
                               3133                 :                :      * We execute the first action for which the additional WHEN MATCHED AND
                               3134                 :                :      * quals pass.  If an action without quals is found, that action is
                               3135                 :                :      * executed.
                               3136                 :                :      *
                               3137                 :                :      * Similarly, in the WHEN NOT MATCHED BY SOURCE case, tupleid or oldtuple
                               3138                 :                :      * is valid, and we look at the given WHEN NOT MATCHED BY SOURCE actions
                               3139                 :                :      * in sequence until one passes.  This is almost identical to the WHEN
                               3140                 :                :      * MATCHED case, and both cases are handled by ExecMergeMatched().
                               3141                 :                :      *
                               3142                 :                :      * Finally, in the WHEN NOT MATCHED [BY TARGET] case, both tupleid and
                               3143                 :                :      * oldtuple are invalid, and we look at the given WHEN NOT MATCHED [BY
                               3144                 :                :      * TARGET] actions in sequence until one passes.
                               3145                 :                :      *
                               3146                 :                :      * Things get interesting in case of concurrent update/delete of the
                               3147                 :                :      * target tuple. Such concurrent update/delete is detected while we are
                               3148                 :                :      * executing a WHEN MATCHED or WHEN NOT MATCHED BY SOURCE action.
                               3149                 :                :      *
                               3150                 :                :      * A concurrent update can:
                               3151                 :                :      *
                               3152                 :                :      * 1. modify the target tuple so that the results from checking any
                               3153                 :                :      *    additional quals attached to WHEN MATCHED or WHEN NOT MATCHED BY
                               3154                 :                :      *    SOURCE actions potentially change, but the result from the join
                               3155                 :                :      *    quals does not change.
                               3156                 :                :      *
                               3157                 :                :      *    In this case, we are still dealing with the same kind of match
                               3158                 :                :      *    (MATCHED or NOT MATCHED BY SOURCE).  We recheck the same list of
                               3159                 :                :      *    actions from the start and choose the first one that satisfies the
                               3160                 :                :      *    new target tuple.
                               3161                 :                :      *
                               3162                 :                :      * 2. modify the target tuple in the WHEN MATCHED case so that the join
                               3163                 :                :      *    quals no longer pass and hence the source and target tuples no
                               3164                 :                :      *    longer match.
                               3165                 :                :      *
                               3166                 :                :      *    In this case, we are now dealing with a NOT MATCHED case, and we
                               3167                 :                :      *    process both WHEN NOT MATCHED BY SOURCE and WHEN NOT MATCHED [BY
                               3168                 :                :      *    TARGET] actions.  First ExecMergeMatched() processes the list of
                               3169                 :                :      *    WHEN NOT MATCHED BY SOURCE actions in sequence until one passes,
                               3170                 :                :      *    then ExecMergeNotMatched() processes any WHEN NOT MATCHED [BY
                               3171                 :                :      *    TARGET] actions in sequence until one passes.  Thus we may execute
                               3172                 :                :      *    two actions; one of each kind.
                               3173                 :                :      *
                               3174                 :                :      * Thus we support concurrent updates that turn MATCHED candidate rows
                               3175                 :                :      * into NOT MATCHED rows.  However, we do not attempt to support cases
                               3176                 :                :      * that would turn NOT MATCHED rows into MATCHED rows, or which would
                               3177                 :                :      * cause a target row to match a different source row.
                               3178                 :                :      *
                               3179                 :                :      * A concurrent delete changes a WHEN MATCHED case to WHEN NOT MATCHED
                               3180                 :                :      * [BY TARGET].
                               3181                 :                :      *
                               3182                 :                :      * ExecMergeMatched() takes care of following the update chain and
                               3183                 :                :      * re-finding the qualifying WHEN MATCHED or WHEN NOT MATCHED BY SOURCE
                               3184                 :                :      * action, as long as the target tuple still exists. If the target tuple
                               3185                 :                :      * gets deleted or a concurrent update causes the join quals to fail, it
                               3186                 :                :      * returns a matched status of false and we call ExecMergeNotMatched().
                               3187                 :                :      * Given that ExecMergeMatched() always makes progress by following the
                               3188                 :                :      * update chain and we never switch from ExecMergeNotMatched() to
                               3189                 :                :      * ExecMergeMatched(), there is no risk of a livelock.
                               3190                 :                :      */
  745                          3191   [ +  +  +  + ]:           7770 :     matched = tupleid != NULL || oldtuple != NULL;
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3192         [ +  + ]:           7770 :     if (matched)
  728 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3193                 :           6424 :         rslot = ExecMergeMatched(context, resultRelInfo, tupleid, oldtuple,
                               3194                 :                :                                  canSetTag, &matched);
                               3195                 :                : 
                               3196                 :                :     /*
                               3197                 :                :      * Deal with the NOT MATCHED case (either a NOT MATCHED tuple from the
                               3198                 :                :      * join, or a previously MATCHED tuple for which ExecMergeMatched() set
                               3199                 :                :      * "matched" to false, indicating that it no longer matches).
                               3200                 :                :      */
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3201         [ +  + ]:           7722 :     if (!matched)
                               3202                 :                :     {
                               3203                 :                :         /*
                               3204                 :                :          * If a concurrent update turned a MATCHED case into a NOT MATCHED
                               3205                 :                :          * case, and we have both WHEN NOT MATCHED BY SOURCE and WHEN NOT
                               3206                 :                :          * MATCHED [BY TARGET] actions, and there is a RETURNING clause,
                               3207                 :                :          * ExecMergeMatched() may have already executed a WHEN NOT MATCHED BY
                               3208                 :                :          * SOURCE action, and computed the row to return.  If so, we cannot
                               3209                 :                :          * execute a WHEN NOT MATCHED [BY TARGET] action now, so mark it as
                               3210                 :                :          * pending (to be processed on the next call to ExecModifyTable()).
                               3211                 :                :          * Otherwise, just process the action now.
                               3212                 :                :          */
  715 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3213         [ +  + ]:           1355 :         if (rslot == NULL)
                               3214                 :           1353 :             rslot = ExecMergeNotMatched(context, resultRelInfo, canSetTag);
                               3215                 :                :         else
                               3216                 :              2 :             context->mtstate->mt_merge_pending_not_matched = context->planSlot;
                               3217                 :                :     }
                               3218                 :                : 
  728                          3219                 :           7692 :     return rslot;
                               3220                 :                : }
                               3221                 :                : 
                               3222                 :                : /*
                               3223                 :                :  * Check and execute the first qualifying MATCHED or NOT MATCHED BY SOURCE
                               3224                 :                :  * action, depending on whether the join quals are satisfied.  If the target
                               3225                 :                :  * relation is a table, the current target tuple is identified by tupleid.
                               3226                 :                :  * Otherwise, if the target relation is a view, oldtuple is the current target
                               3227                 :                :  * tuple from the view.
                               3228                 :                :  *
                               3229                 :                :  * We start from the first WHEN MATCHED or WHEN NOT MATCHED BY SOURCE action
                               3230                 :                :  * and check if the WHEN quals pass, if any. If the WHEN quals for the first
                               3231                 :                :  * action do not pass, we check the second, then the third and so on. If we
                               3232                 :                :  * reach the end without finding a qualifying action, we return NULL.
                               3233                 :                :  * Otherwise, we execute the qualifying action and return its RETURNING
                               3234                 :                :  * result, if any, or NULL.
                               3235                 :                :  *
                               3236                 :                :  * On entry, "*matched" is assumed to be true.  If a concurrent update or
                               3237                 :                :  * delete is detected that causes the join quals to no longer pass, we set it
                               3238                 :                :  * to false, indicating that the caller should process any NOT MATCHED [BY
                               3239                 :                :  * TARGET] actions.
                               3240                 :                :  *
                               3241                 :                :  * After a concurrent update, we restart from the first action to look for a
                               3242                 :                :  * new qualifying action to execute. If the join quals originally passed, and
                               3243                 :                :  * the concurrent update caused them to no longer pass, then we switch from
                               3244                 :                :  * the MATCHED to the NOT MATCHED BY SOURCE list of actions before restarting
                               3245                 :                :  * (and setting "*matched" to false).  As a result we may execute a WHEN NOT
                               3246                 :                :  * MATCHED BY SOURCE action, and set "*matched" to false, causing the caller
                               3247                 :                :  * to also execute a WHEN NOT MATCHED [BY TARGET] action.
                               3248                 :                :  */
                               3249                 :                : static TupleTableSlot *
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3250                 :           6424 : ExecMergeMatched(ModifyTableContext *context, ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                               3251                 :                :                  ItemPointer tupleid, HeapTuple oldtuple, bool canSetTag,
                               3252                 :                :                  bool *matched)
                               3253                 :                : {
                               3254                 :           6424 :     ModifyTableState *mtstate = context->mtstate;
  715 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3255                 :           6424 :     List      **mergeActions = resultRelInfo->ri_MergeActions;
                               3256                 :                :     ItemPointerData lockedtid;
                               3257                 :                :     List       *actionStates;
  728                          3258                 :           6424 :     TupleTableSlot *newslot = NULL;
                               3259                 :           6424 :     TupleTableSlot *rslot = NULL;
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3260                 :           6424 :     EState     *estate = context->estate;
                               3261                 :           6424 :     ExprContext *econtext = mtstate->ps.ps_ExprContext;
                               3262                 :                :     bool        isNull;
                               3263                 :           6424 :     EPQState   *epqstate = &mtstate->mt_epqstate;
                               3264                 :                :     ListCell   *l;
                               3265                 :                : 
                               3266                 :                :     /* Expect matched to be true on entry */
  715 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3267         [ -  + ]:           6424 :     Assert(*matched);
                               3268                 :                : 
                               3269                 :                :     /*
                               3270                 :                :      * If there are no WHEN MATCHED or WHEN NOT MATCHED BY SOURCE actions, we
                               3271                 :                :      * are done.
                               3272                 :                :      */
                               3273         [ +  + ]:           6424 :     if (mergeActions[MERGE_WHEN_MATCHED] == NIL &&
                               3274         [ +  + ]:            603 :         mergeActions[MERGE_WHEN_NOT_MATCHED_BY_SOURCE] == NIL)
  728                          3275                 :            267 :         return NULL;
                               3276                 :                : 
                               3277                 :                :     /*
                               3278                 :                :      * Make tuple and any needed join variables available to ExecQual and
                               3279                 :                :      * ExecProject. The target's existing tuple is installed in the scantuple.
                               3280                 :                :      * This target relation's slot is required only in the case of a MATCHED
                               3281                 :                :      * or NOT MATCHED BY SOURCE tuple and UPDATE/DELETE actions.
                               3282                 :                :      */
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3283                 :           6157 :     econtext->ecxt_scantuple = resultRelInfo->ri_oldTupleSlot;
                               3284                 :           6157 :     econtext->ecxt_innertuple = context->planSlot;
                               3285                 :           6157 :     econtext->ecxt_outertuple = NULL;
                               3286                 :                : 
                               3287                 :                :     /*
                               3288                 :                :      * This routine is only invoked for matched target rows, so we should
                               3289                 :                :      * either have the tupleid of the target row, or an old tuple from the
                               3290                 :                :      * target wholerow junk attr.
                               3291                 :                :      */
  745 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3292   [ +  +  -  + ]:           6157 :     Assert(tupleid != NULL || oldtuple != NULL);
  537 noah@leadboat.com        3293                 :           6157 :     ItemPointerSetInvalid(&lockedtid);
  745 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3294         [ +  + ]:           6157 :     if (oldtuple != NULL)
                               3295                 :                :     {
  537 noah@leadboat.com        3296         [ -  + ]:             48 :         Assert(!resultRelInfo->ri_needLockTagTuple);
  745 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3297                 :             48 :         ExecForceStoreHeapTuple(oldtuple, resultRelInfo->ri_oldTupleSlot,
                               3298                 :                :                                 false);
                               3299                 :                :     }
                               3300                 :                :     else
                               3301                 :                :     {
  537 noah@leadboat.com        3302         [ +  + ]:           6109 :         if (resultRelInfo->ri_needLockTagTuple)
                               3303                 :                :         {
                               3304                 :                :             /*
                               3305                 :                :              * This locks even for CMD_DELETE, for CMD_NOTHING, and for tuples
                               3306                 :                :              * that don't match mas_whenqual.  MERGE on system catalogs is a
                               3307                 :                :              * minor use case, so don't bother optimizing those.
                               3308                 :                :              */
                               3309                 :           4115 :             LockTuple(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc, tupleid,
                               3310                 :                :                       InplaceUpdateTupleLock);
                               3311                 :           4115 :             lockedtid = *tupleid;
                               3312                 :                :         }
                               3313         [ -  + ]:           6109 :         if (!table_tuple_fetch_row_version(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc,
                               3314                 :                :                                            tupleid,
                               3315                 :                :                                            SnapshotAny,
                               3316                 :                :                                            resultRelInfo->ri_oldTupleSlot))
  537 noah@leadboat.com        3317         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :             elog(ERROR, "failed to fetch the target tuple");
                               3318                 :                :     }
                               3319                 :                : 
                               3320                 :                :     /*
                               3321                 :                :      * Test the join condition.  If it's satisfied, perform a MATCHED action.
                               3322                 :                :      * Otherwise, perform a NOT MATCHED BY SOURCE action.
                               3323                 :                :      *
                               3324                 :                :      * Note that this join condition will be NULL if there are no NOT MATCHED
                               3325                 :                :      * BY SOURCE actions --- see transform_MERGE_to_join().  In that case, we
                               3326                 :                :      * need only consider MATCHED actions here.
                               3327                 :                :      */
  715 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3328         [ +  + ]:CBC        6157 :     if (ExecQual(resultRelInfo->ri_MergeJoinCondition, econtext))
                               3329                 :           6064 :         actionStates = mergeActions[MERGE_WHEN_MATCHED];
                               3330                 :                :     else
                               3331                 :             93 :         actionStates = mergeActions[MERGE_WHEN_NOT_MATCHED_BY_SOURCE];
                               3332                 :                : 
                               3333                 :           6157 : lmerge_matched:
                               3334                 :                : 
                               3335   [ +  +  +  +  :          11046 :     foreach(l, actionStates)
                                              +  + ]
                               3336                 :                :     {
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3337                 :           6237 :         MergeActionState *relaction = (MergeActionState *) lfirst(l);
                               3338                 :           6237 :         CmdType     commandType = relaction->mas_action->commandType;
                               3339                 :                :         TM_Result   result;
                               3340                 :           6237 :         UpdateContext updateCxt = {0};
                               3341                 :                : 
                               3342                 :                :         /*
                               3343                 :                :          * Test condition, if any.
                               3344                 :                :          *
                               3345                 :                :          * In the absence of any condition, we perform the action
                               3346                 :                :          * unconditionally (no need to check separately since ExecQual() will
                               3347                 :                :          * return true if there are no conditions to evaluate).
                               3348                 :                :          */
                               3349         [ +  + ]:           6237 :         if (!ExecQual(relaction->mas_whenqual, econtext))
                               3350                 :           4849 :             continue;
                               3351                 :                : 
                               3352                 :                :         /*
                               3353                 :                :          * Check if the existing target tuple meets the USING checks of
                               3354                 :                :          * UPDATE/DELETE RLS policies. If those checks fail, we throw an
                               3355                 :                :          * error.
                               3356                 :                :          *
                               3357                 :                :          * The WITH CHECK quals for UPDATE RLS policies are applied in
                               3358                 :                :          * ExecUpdateAct() and hence we need not do anything special to handle
                               3359                 :                :          * them.
                               3360                 :                :          *
                               3361                 :                :          * NOTE: We must do this after WHEN quals are evaluated, so that we
                               3362                 :                :          * check policies only when they matter.
                               3363                 :                :          */
  951 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3364   [ +  +  +  + ]:           1388 :         if (resultRelInfo->ri_WithCheckOptions && commandType != CMD_NOTHING)
                               3365                 :                :         {
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3366                 :             57 :             ExecWithCheckOptions(commandType == CMD_UPDATE ?
                               3367                 :                :                                  WCO_RLS_MERGE_UPDATE_CHECK : WCO_RLS_MERGE_DELETE_CHECK,
                               3368                 :                :                                  resultRelInfo,
                               3369                 :                :                                  resultRelInfo->ri_oldTupleSlot,
                               3370         [ +  + ]:             57 :                                  context->mtstate->ps.state);
                               3371                 :                :         }
                               3372                 :                : 
                               3373                 :                :         /* Perform stated action */
                               3374   [ +  +  +  - ]:           1376 :         switch (commandType)
                               3375                 :                :         {
                               3376                 :           1098 :             case CMD_UPDATE:
                               3377                 :                : 
                               3378                 :                :                 /*
                               3379                 :                :                  * Project the output tuple, and use that to update the table.
                               3380                 :                :                  * We don't need to filter out junk attributes, because the
                               3381                 :                :                  * UPDATE action's targetlist doesn't have any.
                               3382                 :                :                  */
                               3383                 :           1098 :                 newslot = ExecProject(relaction->mas_proj);
                               3384                 :                : 
  728 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3385                 :           1098 :                 mtstate->mt_merge_action = relaction;
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3386         [ +  + ]:           1098 :                 if (!ExecUpdatePrologue(context, resultRelInfo,
                               3387                 :                :                                         tupleid, NULL, newslot, &result))
                               3388                 :                :                 {
 1098 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3389         [ +  + ]:             10 :                     if (result == TM_Ok)
  537 noah@leadboat.com        3390                 :             80 :                         goto out;   /* "do nothing" */
                               3391                 :                : 
 1098 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3392                 :              7 :                     break;      /* concurrent update/delete */
                               3393                 :                :                 }
                               3394                 :                : 
                               3395                 :                :                 /* INSTEAD OF ROW UPDATE Triggers */
  745                          3396         [ +  + ]:           1088 :                 if (resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc &&
                               3397         [ +  + ]:            174 :                     resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc->trig_update_instead_row)
                               3398                 :                :                 {
                               3399         [ -  + ]:             39 :                     if (!ExecIRUpdateTriggers(estate, resultRelInfo,
                               3400                 :                :                                               oldtuple, newslot))
  537 noah@leadboat.com        3401                 :UBC           0 :                         goto out;   /* "do nothing" */
                               3402                 :                :                 }
                               3403                 :                :                 else
                               3404                 :                :                 {
                               3405                 :                :                     /* checked ri_needLockTagTuple above */
  610 noah@leadboat.com        3406         [ -  + ]:CBC        1049 :                     Assert(oldtuple == NULL);
                               3407                 :                : 
  745 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3408                 :           1049 :                     result = ExecUpdateAct(context, resultRelInfo, tupleid,
                               3409                 :                :                                            NULL, newslot, canSetTag,
                               3410                 :                :                                            &updateCxt);
                               3411                 :                : 
                               3412                 :                :                     /*
                               3413                 :                :                      * As in ExecUpdate(), if ExecUpdateAct() reports that a
                               3414                 :                :                      * cross-partition update was done, then there's nothing
                               3415                 :                :                      * else for us to do --- the UPDATE has been turned into a
                               3416                 :                :                      * DELETE and an INSERT, and we must not perform any of
                               3417                 :                :                      * the usual post-update tasks.  Also, the RETURNING tuple
                               3418                 :                :                      * (if any) has been projected, so we can just return
                               3419                 :                :                      * that.
                               3420                 :                :                      */
                               3421         [ +  + ]:           1037 :                     if (updateCxt.crossPartUpdate)
                               3422                 :                :                     {
                               3423                 :             69 :                         mtstate->mt_merge_updated += 1;
  537 noah@leadboat.com        3424                 :             69 :                         rslot = context->cpUpdateReturningSlot;
                               3425                 :             69 :                         goto out;
                               3426                 :                :                     }
                               3427                 :                :                 }
                               3428                 :                : 
  745 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3429         [ +  + ]:           1007 :                 if (result == TM_Ok)
                               3430                 :                :                 {
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3431                 :            963 :                     ExecUpdateEpilogue(context, &updateCxt, resultRelInfo,
                               3432                 :                :                                        tupleid, NULL, newslot);
                               3433                 :            957 :                     mtstate->mt_merge_updated += 1;
                               3434                 :                :                 }
                               3435                 :           1001 :                 break;
                               3436                 :                : 
                               3437                 :            263 :             case CMD_DELETE:
  728 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3438                 :            263 :                 mtstate->mt_merge_action = relaction;
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3439         [ +  + ]:            263 :                 if (!ExecDeletePrologue(context, resultRelInfo, tupleid,
                               3440                 :                :                                         NULL, NULL, &result))
                               3441                 :                :                 {
 1098 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3442         [ +  + ]:              6 :                     if (result == TM_Ok)
  537 noah@leadboat.com        3443                 :              3 :                         goto out;   /* "do nothing" */
                               3444                 :                : 
 1098 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3445                 :              3 :                     break;      /* concurrent update/delete */
                               3446                 :                :                 }
                               3447                 :                : 
                               3448                 :                :                 /* INSTEAD OF ROW DELETE Triggers */
  745                          3449         [ +  + ]:            257 :                 if (resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc &&
                               3450         [ +  + ]:             28 :                     resultRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc->trig_delete_instead_row)
                               3451                 :                :                 {
                               3452         [ -  + ]:              3 :                     if (!ExecIRDeleteTriggers(estate, resultRelInfo,
                               3453                 :                :                                               oldtuple))
  537 noah@leadboat.com        3454                 :UBC           0 :                         goto out;   /* "do nothing" */
                               3455                 :                :                 }
                               3456                 :                :                 else
                               3457                 :                :                 {
                               3458                 :                :                     /* checked ri_needLockTagTuple above */
  610 noah@leadboat.com        3459         [ -  + ]:CBC         254 :                     Assert(oldtuple == NULL);
                               3460                 :                : 
  745 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3461                 :            254 :                     result = ExecDeleteAct(context, resultRelInfo, tupleid,
                               3462                 :                :                                            false);
                               3463                 :                :                 }
                               3464                 :                : 
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3465         [ +  + ]:            257 :                 if (result == TM_Ok)
                               3466                 :                :                 {
                               3467                 :            248 :                     ExecDeleteEpilogue(context, resultRelInfo, tupleid, NULL,
                               3468                 :                :                                        false);
                               3469                 :            248 :                     mtstate->mt_merge_deleted += 1;
                               3470                 :                :                 }
                               3471                 :            257 :                 break;
                               3472                 :                : 
                               3473                 :             15 :             case CMD_NOTHING:
                               3474                 :                :                 /* Doing nothing is always OK */
                               3475                 :             15 :                 result = TM_Ok;
                               3476                 :             15 :                 break;
                               3477                 :                : 
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3478                 :UBC           0 :             default:
  715 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3479         [ #  # ]:              0 :                 elog(ERROR, "unknown action in MERGE WHEN clause");
                               3480                 :                :         }
                               3481                 :                : 
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3482   [ +  +  +  +  :CBC        1283 :         switch (result)
                                              -  - ]
                               3483                 :                :         {
                               3484                 :           1220 :             case TM_Ok:
                               3485                 :                :                 /* all good; perform final actions */
 1214                          3486   [ +  +  +  + ]:           1220 :                 if (canSetTag && commandType != CMD_NOTHING)
 1448                          3487                 :           1194 :                     (estate->es_processed)++;
                               3488                 :                : 
                               3489                 :           1220 :                 break;
                               3490                 :                : 
                               3491                 :             16 :             case TM_SelfModified:
                               3492                 :                : 
                               3493                 :                :                 /*
                               3494                 :                :                  * The target tuple was already updated or deleted by the
                               3495                 :                :                  * current command, or by a later command in the current
                               3496                 :                :                  * transaction.  The former case is explicitly disallowed by
                               3497                 :                :                  * the SQL standard for MERGE, which insists that the MERGE
                               3498                 :                :                  * join condition should not join a target row to more than
                               3499                 :                :                  * one source row.
                               3500                 :                :                  *
                               3501                 :                :                  * The latter case arises if the tuple is modified by a
                               3502                 :                :                  * command in a BEFORE trigger, or perhaps by a command in a
                               3503                 :                :                  * volatile function used in the query.  In such situations we
                               3504                 :                :                  * should not ignore the MERGE action, but it is equally
                               3505                 :                :                  * unsafe to proceed.  We don't want to discard the original
                               3506                 :                :                  * MERGE action while keeping the triggered actions based on
                               3507                 :                :                  * it; and it would be no better to allow the original MERGE
                               3508                 :                :                  * action while discarding the updates that it triggered.  So
                               3509                 :                :                  * throwing an error is the only safe course.
                               3510                 :                :                  */
  738 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3511         [ +  + ]:             16 :                 if (context->tmfd.cmax != estate->es_output_cid)
                               3512         [ +  - ]:              6 :                     ereport(ERROR,
                               3513                 :                :                             (errcode(ERRCODE_TRIGGERED_DATA_CHANGE_VIOLATION),
                               3514                 :                :                              errmsg("tuple to be updated or deleted was already modified by an operation triggered by the current command"),
                               3515                 :                :                              errhint("Consider using an AFTER trigger instead of a BEFORE trigger to propagate changes to other rows.")));
                               3516                 :                : 
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3517         [ +  - ]:             10 :                 if (TransactionIdIsCurrentTransactionId(context->tmfd.xmax))
                               3518         [ +  - ]:             10 :                     ereport(ERROR,
                               3519                 :                :                             (errcode(ERRCODE_CARDINALITY_VIOLATION),
                               3520                 :                :                     /* translator: %s is a SQL command name */
                               3521                 :                :                              errmsg("%s command cannot affect row a second time",
                               3522                 :                :                                     "MERGE"),
                               3523                 :                :                              errhint("Ensure that not more than one source row matches any one target row.")));
                               3524                 :                : 
                               3525                 :                :                 /* This shouldn't happen */
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3526         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                 elog(ERROR, "attempted to update or delete invisible tuple");
                               3527                 :                :                 break;
                               3528                 :                : 
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3529                 :CBC           5 :             case TM_Deleted:
                               3530         [ -  + ]:              5 :                 if (IsolationUsesXactSnapshot())
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3531         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                     ereport(ERROR,
                               3532                 :                :                             (errcode(ERRCODE_T_R_SERIALIZATION_FAILURE),
                               3533                 :                :                              errmsg("could not serialize access due to concurrent delete")));
                               3534                 :                : 
                               3535                 :                :                 /*
                               3536                 :                :                  * If the tuple was already deleted, set matched to false to
                               3537                 :                :                  * let caller handle it under NOT MATCHED [BY TARGET] clauses.
                               3538                 :                :                  */
  728 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3539                 :CBC           5 :                 *matched = false;
  537 noah@leadboat.com        3540                 :              5 :                 goto out;
                               3541                 :                : 
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3542                 :             42 :             case TM_Updated:
                               3543                 :                :                 {
                               3544                 :                :                     bool        was_matched;
                               3545                 :                :                     Relation    resultRelationDesc;
                               3546                 :                :                     TupleTableSlot *epqslot,
                               3547                 :                :                                *inputslot;
                               3548                 :                :                     LockTupleMode lockmode;
                               3549                 :                : 
   10 akorotkov@postgresql     3550         [ +  + ]:             42 :                     if (IsolationUsesXactSnapshot())
                               3551         [ +  - ]:              1 :                         ereport(ERROR,
                               3552                 :                :                                 (errcode(ERRCODE_T_R_SERIALIZATION_FAILURE),
                               3553                 :                :                                  errmsg("could not serialize access due to concurrent update")));
                               3554                 :                : 
                               3555                 :                :                     /*
                               3556                 :                :                      * The target tuple was concurrently updated by some other
                               3557                 :                :                      * transaction.  If we are currently processing a MATCHED
                               3558                 :                :                      * action, use EvalPlanQual() with the new version of the
                               3559                 :                :                      * tuple and recheck the join qual, to detect a change
                               3560                 :                :                      * from the MATCHED to the NOT MATCHED cases.  If we are
                               3561                 :                :                      * already processing a NOT MATCHED BY SOURCE action, we
                               3562                 :                :                      * skip this (cannot switch from NOT MATCHED BY SOURCE to
                               3563                 :                :                      * MATCHED).
                               3564                 :                :                      */
  715 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3565                 :             41 :                     was_matched = relaction->mas_action->matchKind == MERGE_WHEN_MATCHED;
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3566                 :             41 :                     resultRelationDesc = resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc;
                               3567                 :             41 :                     lockmode = ExecUpdateLockMode(estate, resultRelInfo);
                               3568                 :                : 
  715 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3569         [ +  - ]:             41 :                     if (was_matched)
                               3570                 :             41 :                         inputslot = EvalPlanQualSlot(epqstate, resultRelationDesc,
                               3571                 :                :                                                      resultRelInfo->ri_RangeTableIndex);
                               3572                 :                :                     else
  715 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3573                 :UBC           0 :                         inputslot = resultRelInfo->ri_oldTupleSlot;
                               3574                 :                : 
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3575                 :CBC          41 :                     result = table_tuple_lock(resultRelationDesc, tupleid,
                               3576                 :                :                                               estate->es_snapshot,
                               3577                 :                :                                               inputslot, estate->es_output_cid,
                               3578                 :                :                                               lockmode, LockWaitBlock,
                               3579                 :                :                                               TUPLE_LOCK_FLAG_FIND_LAST_VERSION,
                               3580                 :                :                                               &context->tmfd);
                               3581   [ +  -  +  - ]:             41 :                     switch (result)
                               3582                 :                :                     {
                               3583                 :             40 :                         case TM_Ok:
                               3584                 :                : 
                               3585                 :                :                             /*
                               3586                 :                :                              * If the tuple was updated and migrated to
                               3587                 :                :                              * another partition concurrently, the current
                               3588                 :                :                              * MERGE implementation can't follow.  There's
                               3589                 :                :                              * probably a better way to handle this case, but
                               3590                 :                :                              * it'd require recognizing the relation to which
                               3591                 :                :                              * the tuple moved, and setting our current
                               3592                 :                :                              * resultRelInfo to that.
                               3593                 :                :                              */
  191 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3594         [ -  + ]:             40 :                             if (ItemPointerIndicatesMovedPartitions(tupleid))
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3595         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                                 ereport(ERROR,
                               3596                 :                :                                         (errcode(ERRCODE_T_R_SERIALIZATION_FAILURE),
                               3597                 :                :                                          errmsg("tuple to be merged was already moved to another partition due to concurrent update")));
                               3598                 :                : 
                               3599                 :                :                             /*
                               3600                 :                :                              * If this was a MATCHED case, use EvalPlanQual()
                               3601                 :                :                              * to recheck the join condition.
                               3602                 :                :                              */
  715 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3603         [ +  - ]:CBC          40 :                             if (was_matched)
                               3604                 :                :                             {
                               3605                 :             40 :                                 epqslot = EvalPlanQual(epqstate,
                               3606                 :                :                                                        resultRelationDesc,
                               3607                 :                :                                                        resultRelInfo->ri_RangeTableIndex,
                               3608                 :                :                                                        inputslot);
                               3609                 :                : 
                               3610                 :                :                                 /*
                               3611                 :                :                                  * If the subplan didn't return a tuple, then
                               3612                 :                :                                  * we must be dealing with an inner join for
                               3613                 :                :                                  * which the join condition no longer matches.
                               3614                 :                :                                  * This can only happen if there are no NOT
                               3615                 :                :                                  * MATCHED actions, and so there is nothing
                               3616                 :                :                                  * more to do.
                               3617                 :                :                                  */
                               3618   [ +  -  -  + ]:             40 :                                 if (TupIsNull(epqslot))
  537 noah@leadboat.com        3619                 :UBC           0 :                                     goto out;
                               3620                 :                : 
                               3621                 :                :                                 /*
                               3622                 :                :                                  * If we got a NULL ctid from the subplan, the
                               3623                 :                :                                  * join quals no longer pass and we switch to
                               3624                 :                :                                  * the NOT MATCHED BY SOURCE case.
                               3625                 :                :                                  */
  715 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3626                 :CBC          40 :                                 (void) ExecGetJunkAttribute(epqslot,
                               3627                 :             40 :                                                             resultRelInfo->ri_RowIdAttNo,
                               3628                 :                :                                                             &isNull);
                               3629         [ +  + ]:             40 :                                 if (isNull)
                               3630                 :              2 :                                     *matched = false;
                               3631                 :                : 
                               3632                 :                :                                 /*
                               3633                 :                :                                  * Otherwise, recheck the join quals to see if
                               3634                 :                :                                  * we need to switch to the NOT MATCHED BY
                               3635                 :                :                                  * SOURCE case.
                               3636                 :                :                                  */
  537 noah@leadboat.com        3637         [ +  + ]:             40 :                                 if (resultRelInfo->ri_needLockTagTuple)
                               3638                 :                :                                 {
                               3639         [ +  - ]:              1 :                                     if (ItemPointerIsValid(&lockedtid))
                               3640                 :              1 :                                         UnlockTuple(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc, &lockedtid,
                               3641                 :                :                                                     InplaceUpdateTupleLock);
  191 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3642                 :              1 :                                     LockTuple(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc, tupleid,
                               3643                 :                :                                               InplaceUpdateTupleLock);
                               3644                 :              1 :                                     lockedtid = *tupleid;
                               3645                 :                :                                 }
                               3646                 :                : 
  715                          3647         [ -  + ]:             40 :                                 if (!table_tuple_fetch_row_version(resultRelationDesc,
                               3648                 :                :                                                                    tupleid,
                               3649                 :                :                                                                    SnapshotAny,
                               3650                 :                :                                                                    resultRelInfo->ri_oldTupleSlot))
  715 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3651         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                                     elog(ERROR, "failed to fetch the target tuple");
                               3652                 :                : 
  715 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3653         [ +  + ]:CBC          40 :                                 if (*matched)
                               3654                 :             38 :                                     *matched = ExecQual(resultRelInfo->ri_MergeJoinCondition,
                               3655                 :                :                                                         econtext);
                               3656                 :                : 
                               3657                 :                :                                 /* Switch lists, if necessary */
                               3658         [ +  + ]:             40 :                                 if (!*matched)
                               3659                 :                :                                 {
                               3660                 :              4 :                                     actionStates = mergeActions[MERGE_WHEN_NOT_MATCHED_BY_SOURCE];
                               3661                 :                : 
                               3662                 :                :                                     /*
                               3663                 :                :                                      * If we have both NOT MATCHED BY SOURCE
                               3664                 :                :                                      * and NOT MATCHED BY TARGET actions (a
                               3665                 :                :                                      * full join between the source and target
                               3666                 :                :                                      * relations), the single previously
                               3667                 :                :                                      * matched tuple from the outer plan node
                               3668                 :                :                                      * is treated as two not matched tuples,
                               3669                 :                :                                      * in the same way as if they had not
                               3670                 :                :                                      * matched to start with.  Therefore, we
                               3671                 :                :                                      * must adjust the outer plan node's tuple
                               3672                 :                :                                      * count, if we're instrumenting the
                               3673                 :                :                                      * query, to get the correct "skipped" row
                               3674                 :                :                                      * count --- see show_modifytable_info().
                               3675                 :                :                                      */
  119                          3676         [ +  + ]:              4 :                                     if (outerPlanState(mtstate)->instrument &&
                               3677         [ +  - ]:              1 :                                         mergeActions[MERGE_WHEN_NOT_MATCHED_BY_SOURCE] &&
                               3678         [ +  - ]:              1 :                                         mergeActions[MERGE_WHEN_NOT_MATCHED_BY_TARGET])
                               3679                 :              1 :                                         InstrUpdateTupleCount(outerPlanState(mtstate)->instrument, 1.0);
                               3680                 :                :                                 }
                               3681                 :                :                             }
                               3682                 :                : 
                               3683                 :                :                             /*
                               3684                 :                :                              * Loop back and process the MATCHED or NOT
                               3685                 :                :                              * MATCHED BY SOURCE actions from the start.
                               3686                 :                :                              */
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3687                 :             40 :                             goto lmerge_matched;
                               3688                 :                : 
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3689                 :UBC           0 :                         case TM_Deleted:
                               3690                 :                : 
                               3691                 :                :                             /*
                               3692                 :                :                              * tuple already deleted; tell caller to run NOT
                               3693                 :                :                              * MATCHED [BY TARGET] actions
                               3694                 :                :                              */
  728 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3695                 :              0 :                             *matched = false;
  537 noah@leadboat.com        3696                 :              0 :                             goto out;
                               3697                 :                : 
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3698                 :CBC           1 :                         case TM_SelfModified:
                               3699                 :                : 
                               3700                 :                :                             /*
                               3701                 :                :                              * This can be reached when following an update
                               3702                 :                :                              * chain from a tuple updated by another session,
                               3703                 :                :                              * reaching a tuple that was already updated or
                               3704                 :                :                              * deleted by the current command, or by a later
                               3705                 :                :                              * command in the current transaction. As above,
                               3706                 :                :                              * this should always be treated as an error.
                               3707                 :                :                              */
                               3708         [ -  + ]:              1 :                             if (context->tmfd.cmax != estate->es_output_cid)
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3709         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                                 ereport(ERROR,
                               3710                 :                :                                         (errcode(ERRCODE_TRIGGERED_DATA_CHANGE_VIOLATION),
                               3711                 :                :                                          errmsg("tuple to be updated or deleted was already modified by an operation triggered by the current command"),
                               3712                 :                :                                          errhint("Consider using an AFTER trigger instead of a BEFORE trigger to propagate changes to other rows.")));
                               3713                 :                : 
  738 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3714         [ +  - ]:CBC           1 :                             if (TransactionIdIsCurrentTransactionId(context->tmfd.xmax))
                               3715         [ +  - ]:              1 :                                 ereport(ERROR,
                               3716                 :                :                                         (errcode(ERRCODE_CARDINALITY_VIOLATION),
                               3717                 :                :                                 /* translator: %s is a SQL command name */
                               3718                 :                :                                          errmsg("%s command cannot affect row a second time",
                               3719                 :                :                                                 "MERGE"),
                               3720                 :                :                                          errhint("Ensure that not more than one source row matches any one target row.")));
                               3721                 :                : 
                               3722                 :                :                             /* This shouldn't happen */
  738 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3723         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                             elog(ERROR, "attempted to update or delete invisible tuple");
                               3724                 :                :                             goto out;
                               3725                 :                : 
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3726                 :              0 :                         default:
                               3727                 :                :                             /* see table_tuple_lock call in ExecDelete() */
                               3728         [ #  # ]:              0 :                             elog(ERROR, "unexpected table_tuple_lock status: %u",
                               3729                 :                :                                  result);
                               3730                 :                :                             goto out;
                               3731                 :                :                     }
                               3732                 :                :                 }
                               3733                 :                : 
                               3734                 :              0 :             case TM_Invisible:
                               3735                 :                :             case TM_WouldBlock:
                               3736                 :                :             case TM_BeingModified:
                               3737                 :                :                 /* these should not occur */
                               3738         [ #  # ]:              0 :                 elog(ERROR, "unexpected tuple operation result: %d", result);
                               3739                 :                :                 break;
                               3740                 :                :         }
                               3741                 :                : 
                               3742                 :                :         /* Process RETURNING if present */
  728 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3743         [ +  + ]:CBC        1220 :         if (resultRelInfo->ri_projectReturning)
                               3744                 :                :         {
                               3745   [ +  +  -  - ]:            215 :             switch (commandType)
                               3746                 :                :             {
                               3747                 :             95 :                 case CMD_UPDATE:
  423                          3748                 :             95 :                     rslot = ExecProcessReturning(context,
                               3749                 :                :                                                  resultRelInfo,
                               3750                 :                :                                                  false,
                               3751                 :                :                                                  resultRelInfo->ri_oldTupleSlot,
                               3752                 :                :                                                  newslot,
                               3753                 :                :                                                  context->planSlot);
  728                          3754                 :             95 :                     break;
                               3755                 :                : 
                               3756                 :            120 :                 case CMD_DELETE:
  423                          3757                 :            120 :                     rslot = ExecProcessReturning(context,
                               3758                 :                :                                                  resultRelInfo,
                               3759                 :                :                                                  true,
                               3760                 :                :                                                  resultRelInfo->ri_oldTupleSlot,
                               3761                 :                :                                                  NULL,
                               3762                 :                :                                                  context->planSlot);
  728                          3763                 :            120 :                     break;
                               3764                 :                : 
  728 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3765                 :UBC           0 :                 case CMD_NOTHING:
                               3766                 :              0 :                     break;
                               3767                 :                : 
                               3768                 :              0 :                 default:
                               3769         [ #  # ]:              0 :                     elog(ERROR, "unrecognized commandType: %d",
                               3770                 :                :                          (int) commandType);
                               3771                 :                :             }
                               3772                 :                :         }
                               3773                 :                : 
                               3774                 :                :         /*
                               3775                 :                :          * We've activated one of the WHEN clauses, so we don't search
                               3776                 :                :          * further. This is required behaviour, not an optimization.
                               3777                 :                :          */
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3778                 :CBC        1220 :         break;
                               3779                 :                :     }
                               3780                 :                : 
                               3781                 :                :     /*
                               3782                 :                :      * Successfully executed an action or no qualifying action was found.
                               3783                 :                :      */
  537 noah@leadboat.com        3784                 :           6109 : out:
                               3785         [ +  + ]:           6109 :     if (ItemPointerIsValid(&lockedtid))
                               3786                 :           4115 :         UnlockTuple(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc, &lockedtid,
                               3787                 :                :                     InplaceUpdateTupleLock);
  728 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3788                 :           6109 :     return rslot;
                               3789                 :                : }
                               3790                 :                : 
                               3791                 :                : /*
                               3792                 :                :  * Execute the first qualifying NOT MATCHED [BY TARGET] action.
                               3793                 :                :  */
                               3794                 :                : static TupleTableSlot *
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3795                 :           1355 : ExecMergeNotMatched(ModifyTableContext *context, ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo,
                               3796                 :                :                     bool canSetTag)
                               3797                 :                : {
                               3798                 :           1355 :     ModifyTableState *mtstate = context->mtstate;
                               3799                 :           1355 :     ExprContext *econtext = mtstate->ps.ps_ExprContext;
                               3800                 :                :     List       *actionStates;
  728 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3801                 :           1355 :     TupleTableSlot *rslot = NULL;
                               3802                 :                :     ListCell   *l;
                               3803                 :                : 
                               3804                 :                :     /*
                               3805                 :                :      * For INSERT actions, the root relation's merge action is OK since the
                               3806                 :                :      * INSERT's targetlist and the WHEN conditions can only refer to the
                               3807                 :                :      * source relation and hence it does not matter which result relation we
                               3808                 :                :      * work with.
                               3809                 :                :      *
                               3810                 :                :      * XXX does this mean that we can avoid creating copies of actionStates on
                               3811                 :                :      * partitioned tables, for not-matched actions?
                               3812                 :                :      */
  715                          3813                 :           1355 :     actionStates = resultRelInfo->ri_MergeActions[MERGE_WHEN_NOT_MATCHED_BY_TARGET];
                               3814                 :                : 
                               3815                 :                :     /*
                               3816                 :                :      * Make source tuple available to ExecQual and ExecProject. We don't need
                               3817                 :                :      * the target tuple, since the WHEN quals and targetlist can't refer to
                               3818                 :                :      * the target columns.
                               3819                 :                :      */
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3820                 :           1355 :     econtext->ecxt_scantuple = NULL;
                               3821                 :           1355 :     econtext->ecxt_innertuple = context->planSlot;
                               3822                 :           1355 :     econtext->ecxt_outertuple = NULL;
                               3823                 :                : 
                               3824   [ +  -  +  +  :           1790 :     foreach(l, actionStates)
                                              +  + ]
                               3825                 :                :     {
                               3826                 :           1355 :         MergeActionState *action = (MergeActionState *) lfirst(l);
                               3827                 :           1355 :         CmdType     commandType = action->mas_action->commandType;
                               3828                 :                :         TupleTableSlot *newslot;
                               3829                 :                : 
                               3830                 :                :         /*
                               3831                 :                :          * Test condition, if any.
                               3832                 :                :          *
                               3833                 :                :          * In the absence of any condition, we perform the action
                               3834                 :                :          * unconditionally (no need to check separately since ExecQual() will
                               3835                 :                :          * return true if there are no conditions to evaluate).
                               3836                 :                :          */
                               3837         [ +  + ]:           1355 :         if (!ExecQual(action->mas_whenqual, econtext))
                               3838                 :            435 :             continue;
                               3839                 :                : 
                               3840                 :                :         /* Perform stated action */
                               3841      [ +  -  - ]:            920 :         switch (commandType)
                               3842                 :                :         {
                               3843                 :            920 :             case CMD_INSERT:
                               3844                 :                : 
                               3845                 :                :                 /*
                               3846                 :                :                  * Project the tuple.  In case of a partitioned table, the
                               3847                 :                :                  * projection was already built to use the root's descriptor,
                               3848                 :                :                  * so we don't need to map the tuple here.
                               3849                 :                :                  */
                               3850                 :            920 :                 newslot = ExecProject(action->mas_proj);
  728 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3851                 :            920 :                 mtstate->mt_merge_action = action;
                               3852                 :                : 
                               3853                 :            920 :                 rslot = ExecInsert(context, mtstate->rootResultRelInfo,
                               3854                 :                :                                    newslot, canSetTag, NULL, NULL);
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3855                 :            890 :                 mtstate->mt_merge_inserted += 1;
                               3856                 :            890 :                 break;
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3857                 :UBC           0 :             case CMD_NOTHING:
                               3858                 :                :                 /* Do nothing */
                               3859                 :              0 :                 break;
                               3860                 :              0 :             default:
                               3861         [ #  # ]:              0 :                 elog(ERROR, "unknown action in MERGE WHEN NOT MATCHED clause");
                               3862                 :                :         }
                               3863                 :                : 
                               3864                 :                :         /*
                               3865                 :                :          * We've activated one of the WHEN clauses, so we don't search
                               3866                 :                :          * further. This is required behaviour, not an optimization.
                               3867                 :                :          */
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3868                 :CBC         890 :         break;
                               3869                 :                :     }
                               3870                 :                : 
  728 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3871                 :           1325 :     return rslot;
                               3872                 :                : }
                               3873                 :                : 
                               3874                 :                : /*
                               3875                 :                :  * Initialize state for execution of MERGE.
                               3876                 :                :  */
                               3877                 :                : void
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3878                 :            816 : ExecInitMerge(ModifyTableState *mtstate, EState *estate)
                               3879                 :                : {
  391 amitlan@postgresql.o     3880                 :            816 :     List       *mergeActionLists = mtstate->mt_mergeActionLists;
                               3881                 :            816 :     List       *mergeJoinConditions = mtstate->mt_mergeJoinConditions;
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3882                 :            816 :     ResultRelInfo *rootRelInfo = mtstate->rootResultRelInfo;
                               3883                 :                :     ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo;
                               3884                 :                :     ExprContext *econtext;
                               3885                 :                :     ListCell   *lc;
                               3886                 :                :     int         i;
                               3887                 :                : 
  391 amitlan@postgresql.o     3888         [ -  + ]:            816 :     if (mergeActionLists == NIL)
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3889                 :UBC           0 :         return;
                               3890                 :                : 
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3891                 :CBC         816 :     mtstate->mt_merge_subcommands = 0;
                               3892                 :                : 
                               3893         [ +  + ]:            816 :     if (mtstate->ps.ps_ExprContext == NULL)
                               3894                 :            671 :         ExecAssignExprContext(estate, &mtstate->ps);
                               3895                 :            816 :     econtext = mtstate->ps.ps_ExprContext;
                               3896                 :                : 
                               3897                 :                :     /*
                               3898                 :                :      * Create a MergeActionState for each action on the mergeActionList and
                               3899                 :                :      * add it to either a list of matched actions or not-matched actions.
                               3900                 :                :      *
                               3901                 :                :      * Similar logic appears in ExecInitPartitionInfo(), so if changing
                               3902                 :                :      * anything here, do so there too.
                               3903                 :                :      */
                               3904                 :            816 :     i = 0;
  391 amitlan@postgresql.o     3905   [ +  -  +  +  :           1753 :     foreach(lc, mergeActionLists)
                                              +  + ]
                               3906                 :                :     {
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3907                 :            937 :         List       *mergeActionList = lfirst(lc);
                               3908                 :                :         Node       *joinCondition;
                               3909                 :                :         TupleDesc   relationDesc;
                               3910                 :                :         ListCell   *l;
                               3911                 :                : 
  391 amitlan@postgresql.o     3912                 :            937 :         joinCondition = (Node *) list_nth(mergeJoinConditions, i);
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3913                 :            937 :         resultRelInfo = mtstate->resultRelInfo + i;
                               3914                 :            937 :         i++;
                               3915                 :            937 :         relationDesc = RelationGetDescr(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc);
                               3916                 :                : 
                               3917                 :                :         /* initialize slots for MERGE fetches from this rel */
                               3918         [ +  - ]:            937 :         if (unlikely(!resultRelInfo->ri_projectNewInfoValid))
                               3919                 :            937 :             ExecInitMergeTupleSlots(mtstate, resultRelInfo);
                               3920                 :                : 
                               3921                 :                :         /* initialize state for join condition checking */
  715 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3922                 :            937 :         resultRelInfo->ri_MergeJoinCondition =
                               3923                 :            937 :             ExecInitQual((List *) joinCondition, &mtstate->ps);
                               3924                 :                : 
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3925   [ +  -  +  +  :           2581 :         foreach(l, mergeActionList)
                                              +  + ]
                               3926                 :                :         {
                               3927                 :           1644 :             MergeAction *action = (MergeAction *) lfirst(l);
                               3928                 :                :             MergeActionState *action_state;
                               3929                 :                :             TupleTableSlot *tgtslot;
                               3930                 :                :             TupleDesc   tgtdesc;
                               3931                 :                : 
                               3932                 :                :             /*
                               3933                 :                :              * Build action merge state for this rel.  (For partitions,
                               3934                 :                :              * equivalent code exists in ExecInitPartitionInfo.)
                               3935                 :                :              */
                               3936                 :           1644 :             action_state = makeNode(MergeActionState);
                               3937                 :           1644 :             action_state->mas_action = action;
                               3938                 :           1644 :             action_state->mas_whenqual = ExecInitQual((List *) action->qual,
                               3939                 :                :                                                       &mtstate->ps);
                               3940                 :                : 
                               3941                 :                :             /*
                               3942                 :                :              * We create three lists - one for each MergeMatchKind - and stick
                               3943                 :                :              * the MergeActionState into the appropriate list.
                               3944                 :                :              */
  715 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     3945                 :           3288 :             resultRelInfo->ri_MergeActions[action->matchKind] =
                               3946                 :           1644 :                 lappend(resultRelInfo->ri_MergeActions[action->matchKind],
                               3947                 :                :                         action_state);
                               3948                 :                : 
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     3949   [ +  +  +  +  :           1644 :             switch (action->commandType)
                                                 - ]
                               3950                 :                :             {
                               3951                 :            546 :                 case CMD_INSERT:
                               3952                 :                :                     /* INSERT actions always use rootRelInfo */
                               3953                 :            546 :                     ExecCheckPlanOutput(rootRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc,
                               3954                 :                :                                         action->targetList);
                               3955                 :                : 
                               3956                 :                :                     /*
                               3957                 :                :                      * If the MERGE targets a partitioned table, any INSERT
                               3958                 :                :                      * actions must be routed through it, not the child
                               3959                 :                :                      * relations. Initialize the routing struct and the root
                               3960                 :                :                      * table's "new" tuple slot for that, if not already done.
                               3961                 :                :                      * The projection we prepare, for all relations, uses the
                               3962                 :                :                      * root relation descriptor, and targets the plan's root
                               3963                 :                :                      * slot.  (This is consistent with the fact that we
                               3964                 :                :                      * checked the plan output to match the root relation,
                               3965                 :                :                      * above.)
                               3966                 :                :                      */
                               3967         [ +  + ]:            546 :                     if (rootRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc->rd_rel->relkind ==
                               3968                 :                :                         RELKIND_PARTITIONED_TABLE)
                               3969                 :                :                     {
                               3970         [ +  + ]:            168 :                         if (mtstate->mt_partition_tuple_routing == NULL)
                               3971                 :                :                         {
                               3972                 :                :                             /*
                               3973                 :                :                              * Initialize planstate for routing if not already
                               3974                 :                :                              * done.
                               3975                 :                :                              *
                               3976                 :                :                              * Note that the slot is managed as a standalone
                               3977                 :                :                              * slot belonging to ModifyTableState, so we pass
                               3978                 :                :                              * NULL for the 2nd argument.
                               3979                 :                :                              */
                               3980                 :             79 :                             mtstate->mt_root_tuple_slot =
                               3981                 :             79 :                                 table_slot_create(rootRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc,
                               3982                 :                :                                                   NULL);
                               3983                 :             79 :                             mtstate->mt_partition_tuple_routing =
                               3984                 :             79 :                                 ExecSetupPartitionTupleRouting(estate,
                               3985                 :                :                                                                rootRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc);
                               3986                 :                :                         }
                               3987                 :            168 :                         tgtslot = mtstate->mt_root_tuple_slot;
                               3988                 :            168 :                         tgtdesc = RelationGetDescr(rootRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc);
                               3989                 :                :                     }
                               3990                 :                :                     else
                               3991                 :                :                     {
                               3992                 :                :                         /*
                               3993                 :                :                          * If the MERGE targets an inherited table, we insert
                               3994                 :                :                          * into the root table, so we must initialize its
                               3995                 :                :                          * "new" tuple slot, if not already done, and use its
                               3996                 :                :                          * relation descriptor for the projection.
                               3997                 :                :                          *
                               3998                 :                :                          * For non-inherited tables, rootRelInfo and
                               3999                 :                :                          * resultRelInfo are the same, and the "new" tuple
                               4000                 :                :                          * slot will already have been initialized.
                               4001                 :                :                          */
  288 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     4002         [ +  + ]:            378 :                         if (rootRelInfo->ri_newTupleSlot == NULL)
                               4003                 :             18 :                             rootRelInfo->ri_newTupleSlot =
                               4004                 :             18 :                                 table_slot_create(rootRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc,
                               4005                 :                :                                                   &estate->es_tupleTable);
                               4006                 :                : 
                               4007                 :            378 :                         tgtslot = rootRelInfo->ri_newTupleSlot;
                               4008                 :            378 :                         tgtdesc = RelationGetDescr(rootRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc);
                               4009                 :                :                     }
                               4010                 :                : 
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4011                 :            546 :                     action_state->mas_proj =
                               4012                 :            546 :                         ExecBuildProjectionInfo(action->targetList, econtext,
                               4013                 :                :                                                 tgtslot,
                               4014                 :                :                                                 &mtstate->ps,
                               4015                 :                :                                                 tgtdesc);
                               4016                 :                : 
                               4017                 :            546 :                     mtstate->mt_merge_subcommands |= MERGE_INSERT;
                               4018                 :            546 :                     break;
                               4019                 :            825 :                 case CMD_UPDATE:
                               4020                 :            825 :                     action_state->mas_proj =
                               4021                 :            825 :                         ExecBuildUpdateProjection(action->targetList,
                               4022                 :                :                                                   true,
                               4023                 :                :                                                   action->updateColnos,
                               4024                 :                :                                                   relationDesc,
                               4025                 :                :                                                   econtext,
                               4026                 :                :                                                   resultRelInfo->ri_newTupleSlot,
                               4027                 :                :                                                   &mtstate->ps);
                               4028                 :            825 :                     mtstate->mt_merge_subcommands |= MERGE_UPDATE;
                               4029                 :            825 :                     break;
                               4030                 :            235 :                 case CMD_DELETE:
                               4031                 :            235 :                     mtstate->mt_merge_subcommands |= MERGE_DELETE;
                               4032                 :            235 :                     break;
                               4033                 :             38 :                 case CMD_NOTHING:
                               4034                 :             38 :                     break;
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4035                 :UBC           0 :                 default:
  351 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     4036         [ #  # ]:              0 :                     elog(ERROR, "unknown action in MERGE WHEN clause");
                               4037                 :                :                     break;
                               4038                 :                :             }
                               4039                 :                :         }
                               4040                 :                :     }
                               4041                 :                : 
                               4042                 :                :     /*
                               4043                 :                :      * If the MERGE targets an inherited table, any INSERT actions will use
                               4044                 :                :      * rootRelInfo, and rootRelInfo will not be in the resultRelInfo array.
                               4045                 :                :      * Therefore we must initialize its WITH CHECK OPTION constraints and
                               4046                 :                :      * RETURNING projection, as ExecInitModifyTable did for the resultRelInfo
                               4047                 :                :      * entries.
                               4048                 :                :      *
                               4049                 :                :      * Note that the planner does not build a withCheckOptionList or
                               4050                 :                :      * returningList for the root relation, but as in ExecInitPartitionInfo,
                               4051                 :                :      * we can use the first resultRelInfo entry as a reference to calculate
                               4052                 :                :      * the attno's for the root table.
                               4053                 :                :      */
  288 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     4054         [ +  + ]:CBC         816 :     if (rootRelInfo != mtstate->resultRelInfo &&
                               4055         [ +  + ]:            125 :         rootRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc->rd_rel->relkind != RELKIND_PARTITIONED_TABLE &&
                               4056         [ +  + ]:             24 :         (mtstate->mt_merge_subcommands & MERGE_INSERT) != 0)
                               4057                 :                :     {
                               4058                 :             18 :         ModifyTable *node = (ModifyTable *) mtstate->ps.plan;
                               4059                 :             18 :         Relation    rootRelation = rootRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc;
                               4060                 :             18 :         Relation    firstResultRel = mtstate->resultRelInfo[0].ri_RelationDesc;
                               4061                 :             18 :         int         firstVarno = mtstate->resultRelInfo[0].ri_RangeTableIndex;
                               4062                 :             18 :         AttrMap    *part_attmap = NULL;
                               4063                 :                :         bool        found_whole_row;
                               4064                 :                : 
                               4065         [ +  + ]:             18 :         if (node->withCheckOptionLists != NIL)
                               4066                 :                :         {
                               4067                 :                :             List       *wcoList;
                               4068                 :              9 :             List       *wcoExprs = NIL;
                               4069                 :                : 
                               4070                 :                :             /* There should be as many WCO lists as result rels */
                               4071         [ -  + ]:              9 :             Assert(list_length(node->withCheckOptionLists) ==
                               4072                 :                :                    list_length(node->resultRelations));
                               4073                 :                : 
                               4074                 :                :             /*
                               4075                 :                :              * Use the first WCO list as a reference. In the most common case,
                               4076                 :                :              * this will be for the same relation as rootRelInfo, and so there
                               4077                 :                :              * will be no need to adjust its attno's.
                               4078                 :                :              */
                               4079                 :              9 :             wcoList = linitial(node->withCheckOptionLists);
                               4080         [ +  - ]:              9 :             if (rootRelation != firstResultRel)
                               4081                 :                :             {
                               4082                 :                :                 /* Convert any Vars in it to contain the root's attno's */
                               4083                 :                :                 part_attmap =
                               4084                 :              9 :                     build_attrmap_by_name(RelationGetDescr(rootRelation),
                               4085                 :                :                                           RelationGetDescr(firstResultRel),
                               4086                 :                :                                           false);
                               4087                 :                : 
                               4088                 :                :                 wcoList = (List *)
                               4089                 :              9 :                     map_variable_attnos((Node *) wcoList,
                               4090                 :                :                                         firstVarno, 0,
                               4091                 :                :                                         part_attmap,
                               4092                 :              9 :                                         RelationGetForm(rootRelation)->reltype,
                               4093                 :                :                                         &found_whole_row);
                               4094                 :                :             }
                               4095                 :                : 
                               4096   [ +  -  +  +  :             45 :             foreach(lc, wcoList)
                                              +  + ]
                               4097                 :                :             {
                               4098                 :             36 :                 WithCheckOption *wco = lfirst_node(WithCheckOption, lc);
                               4099                 :             36 :                 ExprState  *wcoExpr = ExecInitQual(castNode(List, wco->qual),
                               4100                 :                :                                                    &mtstate->ps);
                               4101                 :                : 
                               4102                 :             36 :                 wcoExprs = lappend(wcoExprs, wcoExpr);
                               4103                 :                :             }
                               4104                 :                : 
                               4105                 :              9 :             rootRelInfo->ri_WithCheckOptions = wcoList;
                               4106                 :              9 :             rootRelInfo->ri_WithCheckOptionExprs = wcoExprs;
                               4107                 :                :         }
                               4108                 :                : 
                               4109         [ +  + ]:             18 :         if (node->returningLists != NIL)
                               4110                 :                :         {
                               4111                 :                :             List       *returningList;
                               4112                 :                : 
                               4113                 :                :             /* There should be as many returning lists as result rels */
                               4114         [ -  + ]:              3 :             Assert(list_length(node->returningLists) ==
                               4115                 :                :                    list_length(node->resultRelations));
                               4116                 :                : 
                               4117                 :                :             /*
                               4118                 :                :              * Use the first returning list as a reference. In the most common
                               4119                 :                :              * case, this will be for the same relation as rootRelInfo, and so
                               4120                 :                :              * there will be no need to adjust its attno's.
                               4121                 :                :              */
                               4122                 :              3 :             returningList = linitial(node->returningLists);
                               4123         [ +  - ]:              3 :             if (rootRelation != firstResultRel)
                               4124                 :                :             {
                               4125                 :                :                 /* Convert any Vars in it to contain the root's attno's */
                               4126         [ -  + ]:              3 :                 if (part_attmap == NULL)
                               4127                 :                :                     part_attmap =
  288 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     4128                 :UBC           0 :                         build_attrmap_by_name(RelationGetDescr(rootRelation),
                               4129                 :                :                                               RelationGetDescr(firstResultRel),
                               4130                 :                :                                               false);
                               4131                 :                : 
                               4132                 :                :                 returningList = (List *)
  288 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     4133                 :CBC           3 :                     map_variable_attnos((Node *) returningList,
                               4134                 :                :                                         firstVarno, 0,
                               4135                 :                :                                         part_attmap,
                               4136                 :              3 :                                         RelationGetForm(rootRelation)->reltype,
                               4137                 :                :                                         &found_whole_row);
                               4138                 :                :             }
                               4139                 :              3 :             rootRelInfo->ri_returningList = returningList;
                               4140                 :                : 
                               4141                 :                :             /* Initialize the RETURNING projection */
                               4142                 :              3 :             rootRelInfo->ri_projectReturning =
                               4143                 :              3 :                 ExecBuildProjectionInfo(returningList, econtext,
                               4144                 :                :                                         mtstate->ps.ps_ResultTupleSlot,
                               4145                 :                :                                         &mtstate->ps,
                               4146                 :                :                                         RelationGetDescr(rootRelation));
                               4147                 :                :         }
                               4148                 :                :     }
                               4149                 :                : }
                               4150                 :                : 
                               4151                 :                : /*
                               4152                 :                :  * Initializes the tuple slots in a ResultRelInfo for any MERGE action.
                               4153                 :                :  *
                               4154                 :                :  * We mark 'projectNewInfoValid' even though the projections themselves
                               4155                 :                :  * are not initialized here.
                               4156                 :                :  */
                               4157                 :                : void
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4158                 :            949 : ExecInitMergeTupleSlots(ModifyTableState *mtstate,
                               4159                 :                :                         ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo)
                               4160                 :                : {
                               4161                 :            949 :     EState     *estate = mtstate->ps.state;
                               4162                 :                : 
                               4163         [ -  + ]:            949 :     Assert(!resultRelInfo->ri_projectNewInfoValid);
                               4164                 :                : 
                               4165                 :            949 :     resultRelInfo->ri_oldTupleSlot =
                               4166                 :            949 :         table_slot_create(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc,
                               4167                 :                :                           &estate->es_tupleTable);
                               4168                 :            949 :     resultRelInfo->ri_newTupleSlot =
                               4169                 :            949 :         table_slot_create(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc,
                               4170                 :                :                           &estate->es_tupleTable);
                               4171                 :            949 :     resultRelInfo->ri_projectNewInfoValid = true;
                               4172                 :            949 : }
                               4173                 :                : 
                               4174                 :                : /*
                               4175                 :                :  * Process BEFORE EACH STATEMENT triggers
                               4176                 :                :  */
                               4177                 :                : static void
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4178                 :          59510 : fireBSTriggers(ModifyTableState *node)
                               4179                 :                : {
 2918 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4180                 :          59510 :     ModifyTable *plan = (ModifyTable *) node->ps.plan;
 1973 heikki.linnakangas@i     4181                 :          59510 :     ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo = node->rootResultRelInfo;
                               4182                 :                : 
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4183   [ +  +  +  +  :          59510 :     switch (node->operation)
                                                 - ]
                               4184                 :                :     {
                               4185                 :          45452 :         case CMD_INSERT:
 3240 rhaas@postgresql.org     4186                 :          45452 :             ExecBSInsertTriggers(node->ps.state, resultRelInfo);
 2918 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4187         [ +  + ]:          45446 :             if (plan->onConflictAction == ONCONFLICT_UPDATE)
 3964 andres@anarazel.de       4188                 :            460 :                 ExecBSUpdateTriggers(node->ps.state,
                               4189                 :                :                                      resultRelInfo);
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4190                 :          45446 :             break;
                               4191                 :           7215 :         case CMD_UPDATE:
 3240 rhaas@postgresql.org     4192                 :           7215 :             ExecBSUpdateTriggers(node->ps.state, resultRelInfo);
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4193                 :           7215 :             break;
                               4194                 :           6104 :         case CMD_DELETE:
 3240 rhaas@postgresql.org     4195                 :           6104 :             ExecBSDeleteTriggers(node->ps.state, resultRelInfo);
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4196                 :           6104 :             break;
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4197                 :            739 :         case CMD_MERGE:
                               4198         [ +  + ]:            739 :             if (node->mt_merge_subcommands & MERGE_INSERT)
                               4199                 :            406 :                 ExecBSInsertTriggers(node->ps.state, resultRelInfo);
                               4200         [ +  + ]:            739 :             if (node->mt_merge_subcommands & MERGE_UPDATE)
                               4201                 :            494 :                 ExecBSUpdateTriggers(node->ps.state, resultRelInfo);
                               4202         [ +  + ]:            739 :             if (node->mt_merge_subcommands & MERGE_DELETE)
                               4203                 :            193 :                 ExecBSDeleteTriggers(node->ps.state, resultRelInfo);
                               4204                 :            739 :             break;
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4205                 :UBC           0 :         default:
                               4206         [ #  # ]:              0 :             elog(ERROR, "unknown operation");
                               4207                 :                :             break;
                               4208                 :                :     }
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4209                 :CBC       59504 : }
                               4210                 :                : 
                               4211                 :                : /*
                               4212                 :                :  * Process AFTER EACH STATEMENT triggers
                               4213                 :                :  */
                               4214                 :                : static void
 3182 rhodiumtoad@postgres     4215                 :          57834 : fireASTriggers(ModifyTableState *node)
                               4216                 :                : {
 2918 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4217                 :          57834 :     ModifyTable *plan = (ModifyTable *) node->ps.plan;
 1973 heikki.linnakangas@i     4218                 :          57834 :     ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo = node->rootResultRelInfo;
                               4219                 :                : 
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4220   [ +  +  +  +  :          57834 :     switch (node->operation)
                                                 - ]
                               4221                 :                :     {
                               4222                 :          44265 :         case CMD_INSERT:
 2918 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4223         [ +  + ]:          44265 :             if (plan->onConflictAction == ONCONFLICT_UPDATE)
 3964 andres@anarazel.de       4224                 :            406 :                 ExecASUpdateTriggers(node->ps.state,
                               4225                 :                :                                      resultRelInfo,
 3102 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4226                 :            406 :                                      node->mt_oc_transition_capture);
 3182 rhodiumtoad@postgres     4227                 :          44265 :             ExecASInsertTriggers(node->ps.state, resultRelInfo,
                               4228                 :          44265 :                                  node->mt_transition_capture);
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4229                 :          44265 :             break;
                               4230                 :           6859 :         case CMD_UPDATE:
 3182 rhodiumtoad@postgres     4231                 :           6859 :             ExecASUpdateTriggers(node->ps.state, resultRelInfo,
                               4232                 :           6859 :                                  node->mt_transition_capture);
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4233                 :           6859 :             break;
                               4234                 :           6049 :         case CMD_DELETE:
 3182 rhodiumtoad@postgres     4235                 :           6049 :             ExecASDeleteTriggers(node->ps.state, resultRelInfo,
                               4236                 :           6049 :                                  node->mt_transition_capture);
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4237                 :           6049 :             break;
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4238                 :            661 :         case CMD_MERGE:
                               4239         [ +  + ]:            661 :             if (node->mt_merge_subcommands & MERGE_DELETE)
                               4240                 :            175 :                 ExecASDeleteTriggers(node->ps.state, resultRelInfo,
                               4241                 :            175 :                                      node->mt_transition_capture);
                               4242         [ +  + ]:            661 :             if (node->mt_merge_subcommands & MERGE_UPDATE)
                               4243                 :            443 :                 ExecASUpdateTriggers(node->ps.state, resultRelInfo,
                               4244                 :            443 :                                      node->mt_transition_capture);
                               4245         [ +  + ]:            661 :             if (node->mt_merge_subcommands & MERGE_INSERT)
                               4246                 :            371 :                 ExecASInsertTriggers(node->ps.state, resultRelInfo,
                               4247                 :            371 :                                      node->mt_transition_capture);
                               4248                 :            661 :             break;
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4249                 :UBC           0 :         default:
                               4250         [ #  # ]:              0 :             elog(ERROR, "unknown operation");
                               4251                 :                :             break;
                               4252                 :                :     }
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4253                 :CBC       57834 : }
                               4254                 :                : 
                               4255                 :                : /*
                               4256                 :                :  * Set up the state needed for collecting transition tuples for AFTER
                               4257                 :                :  * triggers.
                               4258                 :                :  */
                               4259                 :                : static void
 3182 rhodiumtoad@postgres     4260                 :          59692 : ExecSetupTransitionCaptureState(ModifyTableState *mtstate, EState *estate)
                               4261                 :                : {
 2918 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4262                 :          59692 :     ModifyTable *plan = (ModifyTable *) mtstate->ps.plan;
 1973 heikki.linnakangas@i     4263                 :          59692 :     ResultRelInfo *targetRelInfo = mtstate->rootResultRelInfo;
                               4264                 :                : 
                               4265                 :                :     /* Check for transition tables on the directly targeted relation. */
 3182 rhodiumtoad@postgres     4266                 :          59692 :     mtstate->mt_transition_capture =
 3102 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4267                 :          59692 :         MakeTransitionCaptureState(targetRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc,
                               4268                 :          59692 :                                    RelationGetRelid(targetRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc),
                               4269                 :                :                                    mtstate->operation);
 2918 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4270         [ +  + ]:          59692 :     if (plan->operation == CMD_INSERT &&
                               4271         [ +  + ]:          45456 :         plan->onConflictAction == ONCONFLICT_UPDATE)
 3102 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4272                 :            463 :         mtstate->mt_oc_transition_capture =
                               4273                 :            463 :             MakeTransitionCaptureState(targetRelInfo->ri_TrigDesc,
                               4274                 :            463 :                                        RelationGetRelid(targetRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc),
                               4275                 :                :                                        CMD_UPDATE);
 2977 rhaas@postgresql.org     4276                 :          59692 : }
                               4277                 :                : 
                               4278                 :                : /*
                               4279                 :                :  * ExecPrepareTupleRouting --- prepare for routing one tuple
                               4280                 :                :  *
                               4281                 :                :  * Determine the partition in which the tuple in slot is to be inserted,
                               4282                 :                :  * and return its ResultRelInfo in *partRelInfo.  The return value is
                               4283                 :                :  * a slot holding the tuple of the partition rowtype.
                               4284                 :                :  *
                               4285                 :                :  * This also sets the transition table information in mtstate based on the
                               4286                 :                :  * selected partition.
                               4287                 :                :  */
                               4288                 :                : static TupleTableSlot *
 2918 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4289                 :         387969 : ExecPrepareTupleRouting(ModifyTableState *mtstate,
                               4290                 :                :                         EState *estate,
                               4291                 :                :                         PartitionTupleRouting *proute,
                               4292                 :                :                         ResultRelInfo *targetRelInfo,
                               4293                 :                :                         TupleTableSlot *slot,
                               4294                 :                :                         ResultRelInfo **partRelInfo)
                               4295                 :                : {
                               4296                 :                :     ResultRelInfo *partrel;
                               4297                 :                :     TupleConversionMap *map;
                               4298                 :                : 
                               4299                 :                :     /*
                               4300                 :                :      * Lookup the target partition's ResultRelInfo.  If ExecFindPartition does
                               4301                 :                :      * not find a valid partition for the tuple in 'slot' then an error is
                               4302                 :                :      * raised.  An error may also be raised if the found partition is not a
                               4303                 :                :      * valid target for INSERTs.  This is required since a partitioned table
                               4304                 :                :      * UPDATE to another partition becomes a DELETE+INSERT.
                               4305                 :                :      */
 2676                          4306                 :         387969 :     partrel = ExecFindPartition(mtstate, targetRelInfo, proute, slot, estate);
                               4307                 :                : 
                               4308                 :                :     /*
                               4309                 :                :      * If we're capturing transition tuples, we might need to convert from the
                               4310                 :                :      * partition rowtype to root partitioned table's rowtype.  But if there
                               4311                 :                :      * are no BEFORE triggers on the partition that could change the tuple, we
                               4312                 :                :      * can just remember the original unconverted tuple to avoid a needless
                               4313                 :                :      * round trip conversion.
                               4314                 :                :      */
 2918                          4315         [ +  + ]:         387858 :     if (mtstate->mt_transition_capture != NULL)
                               4316                 :                :     {
                               4317                 :                :         bool        has_before_insert_row_trig;
                               4318                 :                : 
 1973 heikki.linnakangas@i     4319         [ +  + ]:             98 :         has_before_insert_row_trig = (partrel->ri_TrigDesc &&
                               4320         [ +  + ]:             21 :                                       partrel->ri_TrigDesc->trig_insert_before_row);
                               4321                 :                : 
                               4322                 :             77 :         mtstate->mt_transition_capture->tcs_original_insert_tuple =
                               4323         [ +  + ]:             77 :             !has_before_insert_row_trig ? slot : NULL;
                               4324                 :                :     }
                               4325                 :                : 
                               4326                 :                :     /*
                               4327                 :                :      * Convert the tuple, if necessary.
                               4328                 :                :      */
 1199 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4329                 :         387858 :     map = ExecGetRootToChildMap(partrel, estate);
 2721 andres@anarazel.de       4330         [ +  + ]:         387858 :     if (map != NULL)
                               4331                 :                :     {
 1973 heikki.linnakangas@i     4332                 :          34298 :         TupleTableSlot *new_slot = partrel->ri_PartitionTupleSlot;
                               4333                 :                : 
 2721 andres@anarazel.de       4334                 :          34298 :         slot = execute_attr_map_slot(map->attrMap, slot, new_slot);
                               4335                 :                :     }
                               4336                 :                : 
 1978 heikki.linnakangas@i     4337                 :         387858 :     *partRelInfo = partrel;
 2918 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4338                 :         387858 :     return slot;
                               4339                 :                : }
                               4340                 :                : 
                               4341                 :                : /* ----------------------------------------------------------------
                               4342                 :                :  *     ExecModifyTable
                               4343                 :                :  *
                               4344                 :                :  *      Perform table modifications as required, and return RETURNING results
                               4345                 :                :  *      if needed.
                               4346                 :                :  * ----------------------------------------------------------------
                               4347                 :                :  */
                               4348                 :                : static TupleTableSlot *
 3163 andres@anarazel.de       4349                 :          64582 : ExecModifyTable(PlanState *pstate)
                               4350                 :                : {
                               4351                 :          64582 :     ModifyTableState *node = castNode(ModifyTableState, pstate);
                               4352                 :                :     ModifyTableContext context;
 5861 bruce@momjian.us         4353                 :          64582 :     EState     *estate = node->ps.state;
                               4354                 :          64582 :     CmdType     operation = node->operation;
                               4355                 :                :     ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo;
                               4356                 :                :     PlanState  *subplanstate;
                               4357                 :                :     TupleTableSlot *slot;
                               4358                 :                :     TupleTableSlot *oldSlot;
                               4359                 :                :     ItemPointerData tuple_ctid;
                               4360                 :                :     HeapTupleData oldtupdata;
                               4361                 :                :     HeapTuple   oldtuple;
                               4362                 :                :     ItemPointer tupleid;
                               4363                 :                :     bool        tuplock;
                               4364                 :                : 
 3155 andres@anarazel.de       4365         [ -  + ]:          64582 :     CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS();
                               4366                 :                : 
                               4367                 :                :     /*
                               4368                 :                :      * This should NOT get called during EvalPlanQual; we should have passed a
                               4369                 :                :      * subplan tree to EvalPlanQual, instead.  Use a runtime test not just
                               4370                 :                :      * Assert because this condition is easy to miss in testing.  (Note:
                               4371                 :                :      * although ModifyTable should not get executed within an EvalPlanQual
                               4372                 :                :      * operation, we do have to allow it to be initialized and shut down in
                               4373                 :                :      * case it is within a CTE subplan.  Hence this test must be here, not in
                               4374                 :                :      * ExecInitModifyTable.)
                               4375                 :                :      */
 2383                          4376         [ -  + ]:          64582 :     if (estate->es_epq_active != NULL)
 5160 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4377         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :         elog(ERROR, "ModifyTable should not be called during EvalPlanQual");
                               4378                 :                : 
                               4379                 :                :     /*
                               4380                 :                :      * If we've already completed processing, don't try to do more.  We need
                               4381                 :                :      * this test because ExecPostprocessPlan might call us an extra time, and
                               4382                 :                :      * our subplan's nodes aren't necessarily robust against being called
                               4383                 :                :      * extra times.
                               4384                 :                :      */
 5497 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4385         [ +  + ]:CBC       64582 :     if (node->mt_done)
                               4386                 :            400 :         return NULL;
                               4387                 :                : 
                               4388                 :                :     /*
                               4389                 :                :      * On first call, fire BEFORE STATEMENT triggers before proceeding.
                               4390                 :                :      */
 6000                          4391         [ +  + ]:          64182 :     if (node->fireBSTriggers)
                               4392                 :                :     {
                               4393                 :          59510 :         fireBSTriggers(node);
                               4394                 :          59504 :         node->fireBSTriggers = false;
                               4395                 :                :     }
                               4396                 :                : 
                               4397                 :                :     /* Preload local variables */
 1810                          4398                 :          64176 :     resultRelInfo = node->resultRelInfo + node->mt_lastResultIndex;
                               4399                 :          64176 :     subplanstate = outerPlanState(node);
                               4400                 :                : 
                               4401                 :                :     /* Set global context */
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4402                 :          64176 :     context.mtstate = node;
                               4403                 :          64176 :     context.epqstate = &node->mt_epqstate;
                               4404                 :          64176 :     context.estate = estate;
                               4405                 :                : 
                               4406                 :                :     /*
                               4407                 :                :      * Fetch rows from subplan, and execute the required table modification
                               4408                 :                :      * for each row.
                               4409                 :                :      */
                               4410                 :                :     for (;;)
                               4411                 :                :     {
                               4412                 :                :         /*
                               4413                 :                :          * Reset the per-output-tuple exprcontext.  This is needed because
                               4414                 :                :          * triggers expect to use that context as workspace.  It's a bit ugly
                               4415                 :                :          * to do this below the top level of the plan, however.  We might need
                               4416                 :                :          * to rethink this later.
                               4417                 :                :          */
 5688 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4418         [ +  + ]:        7917499 :         ResetPerTupleExprContext(estate);
                               4419                 :                : 
                               4420                 :                :         /*
                               4421                 :                :          * Reset per-tuple memory context used for processing on conflict and
                               4422                 :                :          * returning clauses, to free any expression evaluation storage
                               4423                 :                :          * allocated in the previous cycle.
                               4424                 :                :          */
 2679 andres@anarazel.de       4425         [ +  + ]:        7917499 :         if (pstate->ps_ExprContext)
                               4426                 :         178993 :             ResetExprContext(pstate->ps_ExprContext);
                               4427                 :                : 
                               4428                 :                :         /*
                               4429                 :                :          * If there is a pending MERGE ... WHEN NOT MATCHED [BY TARGET] action
                               4430                 :                :          * to execute, do so now --- see the comments in ExecMerge().
                               4431                 :                :          */
  715 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     4432         [ +  + ]:        7917499 :         if (node->mt_merge_pending_not_matched != NULL)
                               4433                 :                :         {
                               4434                 :              2 :             context.planSlot = node->mt_merge_pending_not_matched;
  423                          4435                 :              2 :             context.cpDeletedSlot = NULL;
                               4436                 :                : 
  715                          4437                 :              2 :             slot = ExecMergeNotMatched(&context, node->resultRelInfo,
                               4438                 :              2 :                                        node->canSetTag);
                               4439                 :                : 
                               4440                 :                :             /* Clear the pending action */
                               4441                 :              2 :             node->mt_merge_pending_not_matched = NULL;
                               4442                 :                : 
                               4443                 :                :             /*
                               4444                 :                :              * If we got a RETURNING result, return it to the caller.  We'll
                               4445                 :                :              * continue the work on next call.
                               4446                 :                :              */
                               4447         [ +  - ]:              2 :             if (slot)
                               4448                 :              2 :                 return slot;
                               4449                 :                : 
  715 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     4450                 :UBC           0 :             continue;           /* continue with the next tuple */
                               4451                 :                :         }
                               4452                 :                : 
                               4453                 :                :         /* Fetch the next row from subplan */
 1425 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4454                 :CBC     7917497 :         context.planSlot = ExecProcNode(subplanstate);
  423 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     4455                 :        7917288 :         context.cpDeletedSlot = NULL;
                               4456                 :                : 
                               4457                 :                :         /* No more tuples to process? */
 1425 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4458   [ +  +  +  + ]:        7917288 :         if (TupIsNull(context.planSlot))
                               4459                 :                :             break;
                               4460                 :                : 
                               4461                 :                :         /*
                               4462                 :                :          * When there are multiple result relations, each tuple contains a
                               4463                 :                :          * junk column that gives the OID of the rel from which it came.
                               4464                 :                :          * Extract it and select the correct result relation.
                               4465                 :                :          */
 1810 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4466         [ +  + ]:        7859453 :         if (AttributeNumberIsValid(node->mt_resultOidAttno))
                               4467                 :                :         {
                               4468                 :                :             Datum       datum;
                               4469                 :                :             bool        isNull;
                               4470                 :                :             Oid         resultoid;
                               4471                 :                : 
 1425 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4472                 :           2630 :             datum = ExecGetJunkAttribute(context.planSlot, node->mt_resultOidAttno,
                               4473                 :                :                                          &isNull);
 1810 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4474         [ +  + ]:           2630 :             if (isNull)
                               4475                 :                :             {
                               4476                 :                :                 /*
                               4477                 :                :                  * For commands other than MERGE, any tuples having InvalidOid
                               4478                 :                :                  * for tableoid are errors.  For MERGE, we may need to handle
                               4479                 :                :                  * them as WHEN NOT MATCHED clauses if any, so do that.
                               4480                 :                :                  *
                               4481                 :                :                  * Note that we use the node's toplevel resultRelInfo, not any
                               4482                 :                :                  * specific partition's.
                               4483                 :                :                  */
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4484         [ +  - ]:            254 :                 if (operation == CMD_MERGE)
                               4485                 :                :                 {
 1425                          4486                 :            254 :                     EvalPlanQualSetSlot(&node->mt_epqstate, context.planSlot);
                               4487                 :                : 
  728 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     4488                 :            254 :                     slot = ExecMerge(&context, node->resultRelInfo,
                               4489                 :            254 :                                      NULL, NULL, node->canSetTag);
                               4490                 :                : 
                               4491                 :                :                     /*
                               4492                 :                :                      * If we got a RETURNING result, return it to the caller.
                               4493                 :                :                      * We'll continue the work on next call.
                               4494                 :                :                      */
                               4495         [ +  + ]:            248 :                     if (slot)
                               4496                 :             19 :                         return slot;
                               4497                 :                : 
                               4498                 :            229 :                     continue;   /* continue with the next tuple */
                               4499                 :                :                 }
                               4500                 :                : 
 1810 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4501         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                 elog(ERROR, "tableoid is NULL");
                               4502                 :                :             }
 1810 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4503                 :CBC        2376 :             resultoid = DatumGetObjectId(datum);
                               4504                 :                : 
                               4505                 :                :             /* If it's not the same as last time, we need to locate the rel */
                               4506         [ +  + ]:           2376 :             if (resultoid != node->mt_lastResultOid)
 1804                          4507                 :           1639 :                 resultRelInfo = ExecLookupResultRelByOid(node, resultoid,
                               4508                 :                :                                                          false, true);
                               4509                 :                :         }
                               4510                 :                : 
                               4511                 :                :         /*
                               4512                 :                :          * If resultRelInfo->ri_usesFdwDirectModify is true, all we need to do
                               4513                 :                :          * here is compute the RETURNING expressions.
                               4514                 :                :          */
 3649 rhaas@postgresql.org     4515         [ +  + ]:        7859199 :         if (resultRelInfo->ri_usesFdwDirectModify)
                               4516                 :                :         {
                               4517         [ -  + ]:            347 :             Assert(resultRelInfo->ri_projectReturning);
                               4518                 :                : 
                               4519                 :                :             /*
                               4520                 :                :              * A scan slot containing the data that was actually inserted,
                               4521                 :                :              * updated or deleted has already been made available to
                               4522                 :                :              * ExecProcessReturning by IterateDirectModify, so no need to
                               4523                 :                :              * provide it here.  The individual old and new slots are not
                               4524                 :                :              * needed, since direct-modify is disabled if the RETURNING list
                               4525                 :                :              * refers to OLD/NEW values.
                               4526                 :                :              */
  423 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     4527   [ +  -  -  + ]:            347 :             Assert((resultRelInfo->ri_projectReturning->pi_state.flags & EEO_FLAG_HAS_OLD) == 0 &&
                               4528                 :                :                    (resultRelInfo->ri_projectReturning->pi_state.flags & EEO_FLAG_HAS_NEW) == 0);
                               4529                 :                : 
   31 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     4530                 :GNC         347 :             slot = ExecProcessReturning(&context, resultRelInfo,
                               4531                 :                :                                         operation == CMD_DELETE,
                               4532                 :                :                                         NULL, NULL, context.planSlot);
                               4533                 :                : 
 3649 rhaas@postgresql.org     4534                 :CBC         347 :             return slot;
                               4535                 :                :         }
                               4536                 :                : 
 1425 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4537                 :        7858852 :         EvalPlanQualSetSlot(&node->mt_epqstate, context.planSlot);
                               4538                 :        7858852 :         slot = context.planSlot;
                               4539                 :                : 
 3030 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4540                 :        7858852 :         tupleid = NULL;
 4375 noah@leadboat.com        4541                 :        7858852 :         oldtuple = NULL;
                               4542                 :                : 
                               4543                 :                :         /*
                               4544                 :                :          * For UPDATE/DELETE/MERGE, fetch the row identity info for the tuple
                               4545                 :                :          * to be updated/deleted/merged.  For a heap relation, that's a TID;
                               4546                 :                :          * otherwise we may have a wholerow junk attr that carries the old
                               4547                 :                :          * tuple in toto.  Keep this in step with the part of
                               4548                 :                :          * ExecInitModifyTable that sets up ri_RowIdAttNo.
                               4549                 :                :          */
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4550   [ +  +  +  +  :        7858852 :         if (operation == CMD_UPDATE || operation == CMD_DELETE ||
                                              +  + ]
                               4551                 :                :             operation == CMD_MERGE)
                               4552                 :                :         {
                               4553                 :                :             char        relkind;
                               4554                 :                :             Datum       datum;
                               4555                 :                :             bool        isNull;
                               4556                 :                : 
 1810 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4557                 :         956094 :             relkind = resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc->rd_rel->relkind;
                               4558   [ +  +  +  + ]:         956094 :             if (relkind == RELKIND_RELATION ||
                               4559         [ +  + ]:            285 :                 relkind == RELKIND_MATVIEW ||
                               4560                 :                :                 relkind == RELKIND_PARTITIONED_TABLE)
                               4561                 :                :             {
                               4562                 :                :                 /*
                               4563                 :                :                  * ri_RowIdAttNo refers to a ctid attribute.  See the comment
                               4564                 :                :                  * in ExecInitModifyTable().
                               4565                 :                :                  */
   51 amitlan@postgresql.o     4566   [ -  +  -  - ]:         955812 :                 Assert(AttributeNumberIsValid(resultRelInfo->ri_RowIdAttNo) ||
                               4567                 :                :                        relkind == RELKIND_PARTITIONED_TABLE);
 1810 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4568                 :         955812 :                 datum = ExecGetJunkAttribute(slot,
                               4569                 :         955812 :                                              resultRelInfo->ri_RowIdAttNo,
                               4570                 :                :                                              &isNull);
                               4571                 :                : 
                               4572                 :                :                 /*
                               4573                 :                :                  * For commands other than MERGE, any tuples having a null row
                               4574                 :                :                  * identifier are errors.  For MERGE, we may need to handle
                               4575                 :                :                  * them as WHEN NOT MATCHED clauses if any, so do that.
                               4576                 :                :                  *
                               4577                 :                :                  * Note that we use the node's toplevel resultRelInfo, not any
                               4578                 :                :                  * specific partition's.
                               4579                 :                :                  */
                               4580         [ +  + ]:         955812 :                 if (isNull)
                               4581                 :                :                 {
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4582         [ +  - ]:           1068 :                     if (operation == CMD_MERGE)
                               4583                 :                :                     {
 1425                          4584                 :           1068 :                         EvalPlanQualSetSlot(&node->mt_epqstate, context.planSlot);
                               4585                 :                : 
  728 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     4586                 :           1068 :                         slot = ExecMerge(&context, node->resultRelInfo,
                               4587                 :           1068 :                                          NULL, NULL, node->canSetTag);
                               4588                 :                : 
                               4589                 :                :                         /*
                               4590                 :                :                          * If we got a RETURNING result, return it to the
                               4591                 :                :                          * caller.  We'll continue the work on next call.
                               4592                 :                :                          */
                               4593         [ +  + ]:           1047 :                         if (slot)
                               4594                 :             64 :                             return slot;
                               4595                 :                : 
                               4596                 :           1004 :                         continue;   /* continue with the next tuple */
                               4597                 :                :                     }
                               4598                 :                : 
 1810 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4599         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                     elog(ERROR, "ctid is NULL");
                               4600                 :                :                 }
                               4601                 :                : 
 1810 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4602                 :CBC      954744 :                 tupleid = (ItemPointer) DatumGetPointer(datum);
                               4603                 :         954744 :                 tuple_ctid = *tupleid;  /* be sure we don't free ctid!! */
                               4604                 :         954744 :                 tupleid = &tuple_ctid;
                               4605                 :                :             }
                               4606                 :                : 
                               4607                 :                :             /*
                               4608                 :                :              * Use the wholerow attribute, when available, to reconstruct the
                               4609                 :                :              * old relation tuple.  The old tuple serves one or both of two
                               4610                 :                :              * purposes: 1) it serves as the OLD tuple for row triggers, 2) it
                               4611                 :                :              * provides values for any unchanged columns for the NEW tuple of
                               4612                 :                :              * an UPDATE, because the subplan does not produce all the columns
                               4613                 :                :              * of the target table.
                               4614                 :                :              *
                               4615                 :                :              * Note that the wholerow attribute does not carry system columns,
                               4616                 :                :              * so foreign table triggers miss seeing those, except that we
                               4617                 :                :              * know enough here to set t_tableOid.  Quite separately from
                               4618                 :                :              * this, the FDW may fetch its own junk attrs to identify the row.
                               4619                 :                :              *
                               4620                 :                :              * Other relevant relkinds, currently limited to views, always
                               4621                 :                :              * have a wholerow attribute.
                               4622                 :                :              */
                               4623         [ +  + ]:            282 :             else if (AttributeNumberIsValid(resultRelInfo->ri_RowIdAttNo))
                               4624                 :                :             {
                               4625                 :            267 :                 datum = ExecGetJunkAttribute(slot,
                               4626                 :            267 :                                              resultRelInfo->ri_RowIdAttNo,
                               4627                 :                :                                              &isNull);
                               4628                 :                : 
                               4629                 :                :                 /*
                               4630                 :                :                  * For commands other than MERGE, any tuples having a null row
                               4631                 :                :                  * identifier are errors.  For MERGE, we may need to handle
                               4632                 :                :                  * them as WHEN NOT MATCHED clauses if any, so do that.
                               4633                 :                :                  *
                               4634                 :                :                  * Note that we use the node's toplevel resultRelInfo, not any
                               4635                 :                :                  * specific partition's.
                               4636                 :                :                  */
                               4637         [ +  + ]:            267 :                 if (isNull)
                               4638                 :                :                 {
  745 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     4639         [ +  - ]:             24 :                     if (operation == CMD_MERGE)
                               4640                 :                :                     {
                               4641                 :             24 :                         EvalPlanQualSetSlot(&node->mt_epqstate, context.planSlot);
                               4642                 :                : 
  728                          4643                 :             24 :                         slot = ExecMerge(&context, node->resultRelInfo,
                               4644                 :             24 :                                          NULL, NULL, node->canSetTag);
                               4645                 :                : 
                               4646                 :                :                         /*
                               4647                 :                :                          * If we got a RETURNING result, return it to the
                               4648                 :                :                          * caller.  We'll continue the work on next call.
                               4649                 :                :                          */
                               4650         [ +  + ]:             21 :                         if (slot)
                               4651                 :              6 :                             return slot;
                               4652                 :                : 
                               4653                 :             15 :                         continue;   /* continue with the next tuple */
                               4654                 :                :                     }
                               4655                 :                : 
 1810 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4656         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                     elog(ERROR, "wholerow is NULL");
                               4657                 :                :                 }
                               4658                 :                : 
 1810 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4659                 :CBC         243 :                 oldtupdata.t_data = DatumGetHeapTupleHeader(datum);
                               4660                 :            243 :                 oldtupdata.t_len =
                               4661                 :            243 :                     HeapTupleHeaderGetDatumLength(oldtupdata.t_data);
                               4662                 :            243 :                 ItemPointerSetInvalid(&(oldtupdata.t_self));
                               4663                 :                :                 /* Historically, view triggers see invalid t_tableOid. */
                               4664                 :            243 :                 oldtupdata.t_tableOid =
                               4665         [ +  + ]:            243 :                     (relkind == RELKIND_VIEW) ? InvalidOid :
                               4666                 :            105 :                     RelationGetRelid(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc);
                               4667                 :                : 
                               4668                 :            243 :                 oldtuple = &oldtupdata;
                               4669                 :                :             }
                               4670                 :                :             else
                               4671                 :                :             {
                               4672                 :                :                 /* Only foreign tables are allowed to omit a row-ID attr */
                               4673         [ -  + ]:             15 :                 Assert(relkind == RELKIND_FOREIGN_TABLE);
                               4674                 :                :             }
                               4675                 :                :         }
                               4676                 :                : 
 6000                          4677   [ +  +  +  +  :        7857760 :         switch (operation)
                                                 - ]
                               4678                 :                :         {
                               4679                 :        6902758 :             case CMD_INSERT:
                               4680                 :                :                 /* Initialize projection info if first time for this table */
 1804                          4681         [ +  + ]:        6902758 :                 if (unlikely(!resultRelInfo->ri_projectNewInfoValid))
                               4682                 :          44856 :                     ExecInitInsertProjection(node, resultRelInfo);
 1425 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4683                 :        6902758 :                 slot = ExecGetInsertNewTuple(resultRelInfo, context.planSlot);
 1459                          4684                 :        6902758 :                 slot = ExecInsert(&context, resultRelInfo, slot,
 1456                          4685                 :        6902758 :                                   node->canSetTag, NULL, NULL);
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4686                 :        6901668 :                 break;
                               4687                 :                : 
                               4688                 :         160106 :             case CMD_UPDATE:
  537 noah@leadboat.com        4689                 :         160106 :                 tuplock = false;
                               4690                 :                : 
                               4691                 :                :                 /* Initialize projection info if first time for this table */
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4692         [ +  + ]:         160106 :                 if (unlikely(!resultRelInfo->ri_projectNewInfoValid))
                               4693                 :           7055 :                     ExecInitUpdateProjection(node, resultRelInfo);
                               4694                 :                : 
                               4695                 :                :                 /*
                               4696                 :                :                  * Make the new tuple by combining plan's output tuple with
                               4697                 :                :                  * the old tuple being updated.
                               4698                 :                :                  */
 1810                          4699                 :         160106 :                 oldSlot = resultRelInfo->ri_oldTupleSlot;
                               4700         [ +  + ]:         160106 :                 if (oldtuple != NULL)
                               4701                 :                :                 {
  537 noah@leadboat.com        4702         [ -  + ]:            159 :                     Assert(!resultRelInfo->ri_needLockTagTuple);
                               4703                 :                :                     /* Use the wholerow junk attr as the old tuple. */
 1810 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4704                 :            159 :                     ExecForceStoreHeapTuple(oldtuple, oldSlot, false);
                               4705                 :                :                 }
                               4706                 :                :                 else
                               4707                 :                :                 {
                               4708                 :                :                     /* Fetch the most recent version of old tuple. */
                               4709                 :         159947 :                     Relation    relation = resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc;
                               4710                 :                : 
  537 noah@leadboat.com        4711         [ +  + ]:         159947 :                     if (resultRelInfo->ri_needLockTagTuple)
                               4712                 :                :                     {
                               4713                 :          13495 :                         LockTuple(relation, tupleid, InplaceUpdateTupleLock);
                               4714                 :          13495 :                         tuplock = true;
                               4715                 :                :                     }
 1810 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4716         [ -  + ]:         159947 :                     if (!table_tuple_fetch_row_version(relation, tupleid,
                               4717                 :                :                                                        SnapshotAny,
                               4718                 :                :                                                        oldSlot))
 1810 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4719         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                         elog(ERROR, "failed to fetch tuple being updated");
                               4720                 :                :                 }
 1098 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     4721                 :CBC      160106 :                 slot = ExecGetUpdateNewTuple(resultRelInfo, context.planSlot,
                               4722                 :                :                                              oldSlot);
                               4723                 :                : 
                               4724                 :                :                 /* Now apply the update. */
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4725                 :         160106 :                 slot = ExecUpdate(&context, resultRelInfo, tupleid, oldtuple,
  423 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     4726                 :         160106 :                                   oldSlot, slot, node->canSetTag);
  537 noah@leadboat.com        4727         [ +  + ]:         159854 :                 if (tuplock)
                               4728                 :          13495 :                     UnlockTuple(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc, tupleid,
                               4729                 :                :                                 InplaceUpdateTupleLock);
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4730                 :         159854 :                 break;
                               4731                 :                : 
                               4732                 :         788472 :             case CMD_DELETE:
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4733                 :         788472 :                 slot = ExecDelete(&context, resultRelInfo, tupleid, oldtuple,
  703 akorotkov@postgresql     4734                 :         788472 :                                   true, false, node->canSetTag, NULL, NULL, NULL);
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4735                 :         788438 :                 break;
                               4736                 :                : 
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4737                 :           6424 :             case CMD_MERGE:
  745 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     4738                 :           6424 :                 slot = ExecMerge(&context, resultRelInfo, tupleid, oldtuple,
                               4739                 :           6424 :                                  node->canSetTag);
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4740                 :           6376 :                 break;
                               4741                 :                : 
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4742                 :UBC           0 :             default:
                               4743         [ #  # ]:              0 :                 elog(ERROR, "unknown operation");
                               4744                 :                :                 break;
                               4745                 :                :         }
                               4746                 :                : 
                               4747                 :                :         /*
                               4748                 :                :          * If we got a RETURNING result, return it to caller.  We'll continue
                               4749                 :                :          * the work on next call.
                               4750                 :                :          */
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4751         [ +  + ]:CBC     7856336 :         if (slot)
                               4752                 :           4246 :             return slot;
                               4753                 :                :     }
                               4754                 :                : 
                               4755                 :                :     /*
                               4756                 :                :      * Insert remaining tuples for batch insert.
                               4757                 :                :      */
 1206 efujita@postgresql.o     4758         [ +  + ]:          57835 :     if (estate->es_insert_pending_result_relations != NIL)
                               4759                 :             13 :         ExecPendingInserts(estate);
                               4760                 :                : 
                               4761                 :                :     /*
                               4762                 :                :      * We're done, but fire AFTER STATEMENT triggers before exiting.
                               4763                 :                :      */
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4764                 :          57834 :     fireASTriggers(node);
                               4765                 :                : 
 5497                          4766                 :          57834 :     node->mt_done = true;
                               4767                 :                : 
 6000                          4768                 :          57834 :     return NULL;
                               4769                 :                : }
                               4770                 :                : 
                               4771                 :                : /*
                               4772                 :                :  * ExecLookupResultRelByOid
                               4773                 :                :  *      If the table with given OID is among the result relations to be
                               4774                 :                :  *      updated by the given ModifyTable node, return its ResultRelInfo.
                               4775                 :                :  *
                               4776                 :                :  * If not found, return NULL if missing_ok, else raise error.
                               4777                 :                :  *
                               4778                 :                :  * If update_cache is true, then upon successful lookup, update the node's
                               4779                 :                :  * one-element cache.  ONLY ExecModifyTable may pass true for this.
                               4780                 :                :  */
                               4781                 :                : ResultRelInfo *
 1804                          4782                 :           5625 : ExecLookupResultRelByOid(ModifyTableState *node, Oid resultoid,
                               4783                 :                :                          bool missing_ok, bool update_cache)
                               4784                 :                : {
                               4785         [ +  + ]:           5625 :     if (node->mt_resultOidHash)
                               4786                 :                :     {
                               4787                 :                :         /* Use the pre-built hash table to locate the rel */
                               4788                 :                :         MTTargetRelLookup *mtlookup;
                               4789                 :                : 
                               4790                 :                :         mtlookup = (MTTargetRelLookup *)
                               4791                 :            562 :             hash_search(node->mt_resultOidHash, &resultoid, HASH_FIND, NULL);
                               4792         [ +  - ]:            562 :         if (mtlookup)
                               4793                 :                :         {
                               4794         [ +  + ]:            562 :             if (update_cache)
                               4795                 :                :             {
                               4796                 :            412 :                 node->mt_lastResultOid = resultoid;
                               4797                 :            412 :                 node->mt_lastResultIndex = mtlookup->relationIndex;
                               4798                 :                :             }
                               4799                 :            562 :             return node->resultRelInfo + mtlookup->relationIndex;
                               4800                 :                :         }
                               4801                 :                :     }
                               4802                 :                :     else
                               4803                 :                :     {
                               4804                 :                :         /* With few target rels, just search the ResultRelInfo array */
                               4805         [ +  + ]:           9158 :         for (int ndx = 0; ndx < node->mt_nrels; ndx++)
                               4806                 :                :         {
                               4807                 :           5426 :             ResultRelInfo *rInfo = node->resultRelInfo + ndx;
                               4808                 :                : 
                               4809         [ +  + ]:           5426 :             if (RelationGetRelid(rInfo->ri_RelationDesc) == resultoid)
                               4810                 :                :             {
                               4811         [ +  + ]:           1331 :                 if (update_cache)
                               4812                 :                :                 {
                               4813                 :           1227 :                     node->mt_lastResultOid = resultoid;
                               4814                 :           1227 :                     node->mt_lastResultIndex = ndx;
                               4815                 :                :                 }
                               4816                 :           1331 :                 return rInfo;
                               4817                 :                :             }
                               4818                 :                :         }
                               4819                 :                :     }
                               4820                 :                : 
                               4821         [ -  + ]:           3732 :     if (!missing_ok)
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4822         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :         elog(ERROR, "incorrect result relation OID %u", resultoid);
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4823                 :CBC        3732 :     return NULL;
                               4824                 :                : }
                               4825                 :                : 
                               4826                 :                : /* ----------------------------------------------------------------
                               4827                 :                :  *      ExecInitModifyTable
                               4828                 :                :  * ----------------------------------------------------------------
                               4829                 :                :  */
                               4830                 :                : ModifyTableState *
 6000                          4831                 :          60221 : ExecInitModifyTable(ModifyTable *node, EState *estate, int eflags)
                               4832                 :                : {
                               4833                 :                :     ModifyTableState *mtstate;
 1810                          4834                 :          60221 :     Plan       *subplan = outerPlan(node);
 6000                          4835                 :          60221 :     CmdType     operation = node->operation;
  361 amitlan@postgresql.o     4836                 :          60221 :     int         total_nrels = list_length(node->resultRelations);
                               4837                 :                :     int         nrels;
  401                          4838                 :          60221 :     List       *resultRelations = NIL;
                               4839                 :          60221 :     List       *withCheckOptionLists = NIL;
                               4840                 :          60221 :     List       *returningLists = NIL;
                               4841                 :          60221 :     List       *updateColnosLists = NIL;
  391                          4842                 :          60221 :     List       *mergeActionLists = NIL;
                               4843                 :          60221 :     List       *mergeJoinConditions = NIL;
                               4844                 :                :     ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo;
                               4845                 :                :     List       *arowmarks;
                               4846                 :                :     ListCell   *l;
                               4847                 :                :     int         i;
                               4848                 :                :     Relation    rel;
                               4849                 :                : 
                               4850                 :                :     /* check for unsupported flags */
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4851         [ -  + ]:          60221 :     Assert(!(eflags & (EXEC_FLAG_BACKWARD | EXEC_FLAG_MARK)));
                               4852                 :                : 
                               4853                 :                :     /*
                               4854                 :                :      * Only consider unpruned relations for initializing their ResultRelInfo
                               4855                 :                :      * struct and other fields such as withCheckOptions, etc.
                               4856                 :                :      *
                               4857                 :                :      * Note: We must avoid pruning every result relation.  This is important
                               4858                 :                :      * for MERGE, since even if every result relation is pruned from the
                               4859                 :                :      * subplan, there might still be NOT MATCHED rows, for which there may be
                               4860                 :                :      * INSERT actions to perform.  To allow these actions to be found, at
                               4861                 :                :      * least one result relation must be kept.  Also, when inserting into a
                               4862                 :                :      * partitioned table, ExecInitPartitionInfo() needs a ResultRelInfo struct
                               4863                 :                :      * as a reference for building the ResultRelInfo of the target partition.
                               4864                 :                :      * In either case, it doesn't matter which result relation is kept, so we
                               4865                 :                :      * just keep the first one, if all others have been pruned.  See also,
                               4866                 :                :      * ExecDoInitialPruning(), which ensures that this first result relation
                               4867                 :                :      * has been locked.
                               4868                 :                :      */
  401 amitlan@postgresql.o     4869                 :          60221 :     i = 0;
                               4870   [ +  -  +  +  :         121714 :     foreach(l, node->resultRelations)
                                              +  + ]
                               4871                 :                :     {
                               4872                 :          61493 :         Index       rti = lfirst_int(l);
                               4873                 :                :         bool        keep_rel;
                               4874                 :                : 
  361                          4875                 :          61493 :         keep_rel = bms_is_member(rti, estate->es_unpruned_relids);
                               4876   [ +  +  +  +  :          61493 :         if (!keep_rel && i == total_nrels - 1 && resultRelations == NIL)
                                              +  + ]
                               4877                 :                :         {
                               4878                 :                :             /* all result relations pruned; keep the first one */
                               4879                 :             24 :             keep_rel = true;
                               4880                 :             24 :             rti = linitial_int(node->resultRelations);
                               4881                 :             24 :             i = 0;
                               4882                 :                :         }
                               4883                 :                : 
                               4884         [ +  + ]:          61493 :         if (keep_rel)
                               4885                 :                :         {
  401                          4886                 :          61450 :             resultRelations = lappend_int(resultRelations, rti);
                               4887         [ +  + ]:          61450 :             if (node->withCheckOptionLists)
                               4888                 :                :             {
                               4889                 :            799 :                 List       *withCheckOptions = list_nth_node(List,
                               4890                 :                :                                                              node->withCheckOptionLists,
                               4891                 :                :                                                              i);
                               4892                 :                : 
                               4893                 :            799 :                 withCheckOptionLists = lappend(withCheckOptionLists, withCheckOptions);
                               4894                 :                :             }
                               4895         [ +  + ]:          61450 :             if (node->returningLists)
                               4896                 :                :             {
                               4897                 :           3199 :                 List       *returningList = list_nth_node(List,
                               4898                 :                :                                                           node->returningLists,
                               4899                 :                :                                                           i);
                               4900                 :                : 
                               4901                 :           3199 :                 returningLists = lappend(returningLists, returningList);
                               4902                 :                :             }
                               4903         [ +  + ]:          61450 :             if (node->updateColnosLists)
                               4904                 :                :             {
                               4905                 :           8431 :                 List       *updateColnosList = list_nth(node->updateColnosLists, i);
                               4906                 :                : 
                               4907                 :           8431 :                 updateColnosLists = lappend(updateColnosLists, updateColnosList);
                               4908                 :                :             }
  391                          4909         [ +  + ]:          61450 :             if (node->mergeActionLists)
                               4910                 :                :             {
                               4911                 :            943 :                 List       *mergeActionList = list_nth(node->mergeActionLists, i);
                               4912                 :                : 
                               4913                 :            943 :                 mergeActionLists = lappend(mergeActionLists, mergeActionList);
                               4914                 :                :             }
                               4915         [ +  + ]:          61450 :             if (node->mergeJoinConditions)
                               4916                 :                :             {
                               4917                 :            943 :                 List       *mergeJoinCondition = list_nth(node->mergeJoinConditions, i);
                               4918                 :                : 
                               4919                 :            943 :                 mergeJoinConditions = lappend(mergeJoinConditions, mergeJoinCondition);
                               4920                 :                :             }
                               4921                 :                :         }
  401                          4922                 :          61493 :         i++;
                               4923                 :                :     }
                               4924                 :          60221 :     nrels = list_length(resultRelations);
  361                          4925         [ -  + ]:          60221 :     Assert(nrels > 0);
                               4926                 :                : 
                               4927                 :                :     /*
                               4928                 :                :      * create state structure
                               4929                 :                :      */
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4930                 :          60221 :     mtstate = makeNode(ModifyTableState);
                               4931                 :          60221 :     mtstate->ps.plan = (Plan *) node;
                               4932                 :          60221 :     mtstate->ps.state = estate;
 3163 andres@anarazel.de       4933                 :          60221 :     mtstate->ps.ExecProcNode = ExecModifyTable;
                               4934                 :                : 
 5497 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4935                 :          60221 :     mtstate->operation = operation;
                               4936                 :          60221 :     mtstate->canSetTag = node->canSetTag;
                               4937                 :          60221 :     mtstate->mt_done = false;
                               4938                 :                : 
 1810                          4939                 :          60221 :     mtstate->mt_nrels = nrels;
   95 michael@paquier.xyz      4940                 :GNC       60221 :     mtstate->resultRelInfo = palloc_array(ResultRelInfo, nrels);
                               4941                 :                : 
  715 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     4942                 :CBC       60221 :     mtstate->mt_merge_pending_not_matched = NULL;
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     4943                 :          60221 :     mtstate->mt_merge_inserted = 0;
                               4944                 :          60221 :     mtstate->mt_merge_updated = 0;
                               4945                 :          60221 :     mtstate->mt_merge_deleted = 0;
  401 amitlan@postgresql.o     4946                 :          60221 :     mtstate->mt_updateColnosLists = updateColnosLists;
  391                          4947                 :          60221 :     mtstate->mt_mergeActionLists = mergeActionLists;
                               4948                 :          60221 :     mtstate->mt_mergeJoinConditions = mergeJoinConditions;
                               4949                 :                : 
                               4950                 :                :     /*----------
                               4951                 :                :      * Resolve the target relation. This is the same as:
                               4952                 :                :      *
                               4953                 :                :      * - the relation for which we will fire FOR STATEMENT triggers,
                               4954                 :                :      * - the relation into whose tuple format all captured transition tuples
                               4955                 :                :      *   must be converted, and
                               4956                 :                :      * - the root partitioned table used for tuple routing.
                               4957                 :                :      *
                               4958                 :                :      * If it's a partitioned or inherited table, the root partition or
                               4959                 :                :      * appendrel RTE doesn't appear elsewhere in the plan and its RT index is
                               4960                 :                :      * given explicitly in node->rootRelation.  Otherwise, the target relation
                               4961                 :                :      * is the sole relation in the node->resultRelations list and, since it can
                               4962                 :                :      * never be pruned, also in the resultRelations list constructed above.
                               4963                 :                :      *----------
                               4964                 :                :      */
 1979 heikki.linnakangas@i     4965         [ +  + ]:          60221 :     if (node->rootRelation > 0)
                               4966                 :                :     {
  401 amitlan@postgresql.o     4967         [ -  + ]:           1485 :         Assert(bms_is_member(node->rootRelation, estate->es_unpruned_relids));
 1979 heikki.linnakangas@i     4968                 :           1485 :         mtstate->rootResultRelInfo = makeNode(ResultRelInfo);
                               4969                 :           1485 :         ExecInitResultRelation(estate, mtstate->rootResultRelInfo,
                               4970                 :                :                                node->rootRelation);
                               4971                 :                :     }
                               4972                 :                :     else
                               4973                 :                :     {
  873 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4974         [ -  + ]:          58736 :         Assert(list_length(node->resultRelations) == 1);
  391 amitlan@postgresql.o     4975         [ -  + ]:          58736 :         Assert(list_length(resultRelations) == 1);
 1973 heikki.linnakangas@i     4976                 :          58736 :         mtstate->rootResultRelInfo = mtstate->resultRelInfo;
                               4977                 :          58736 :         ExecInitResultRelation(estate, mtstate->resultRelInfo,
  391 amitlan@postgresql.o     4978                 :          58736 :                                linitial_int(resultRelations));
                               4979                 :                :     }
                               4980                 :                : 
                               4981                 :                :     /* set up epqstate with dummy subplan data for the moment */
 1031 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4982                 :          60221 :     EvalPlanQualInit(&mtstate->mt_epqstate, estate, NULL, NIL,
                               4983                 :                :                      node->epqParam, resultRelations);
 6000                          4984                 :          60221 :     mtstate->fireBSTriggers = true;
                               4985                 :                : 
                               4986                 :                :     /*
                               4987                 :                :      * Build state for collecting transition tuples.  This requires having a
                               4988                 :                :      * valid trigger query context, so skip it in explain-only mode.
                               4989                 :                :      */
 1973 heikki.linnakangas@i     4990         [ +  + ]:          60221 :     if (!(eflags & EXEC_FLAG_EXPLAIN_ONLY))
                               4991                 :          59692 :         ExecSetupTransitionCaptureState(mtstate, estate);
                               4992                 :                : 
                               4993                 :                :     /*
                               4994                 :                :      * Open all the result relations and initialize the ResultRelInfo structs.
                               4995                 :                :      * (But root relation was initialized above, if it's part of the array.)
                               4996                 :                :      * We must do this before initializing the subplan, because direct-modify
                               4997                 :                :      * FDWs expect their ResultRelInfos to be available.
                               4998                 :                :      */
 5497 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        4999                 :          60221 :     resultRelInfo = mtstate->resultRelInfo;
 6000                          5000                 :          60221 :     i = 0;
  401 amitlan@postgresql.o     5001   [ +  -  +  +  :         121500 :     foreach(l, resultRelations)
                                              +  + ]
                               5002                 :                :     {
 1979 heikki.linnakangas@i     5003                 :          61447 :         Index       resultRelation = lfirst_int(l);
  745 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     5004                 :          61447 :         List       *mergeActions = NIL;
                               5005                 :                : 
  391 amitlan@postgresql.o     5006         [ +  + ]:          61447 :         if (mergeActionLists)
                               5007                 :            943 :             mergeActions = list_nth(mergeActionLists, i);
                               5008                 :                : 
 1973 heikki.linnakangas@i     5009         [ +  + ]:          61447 :         if (resultRelInfo != mtstate->rootResultRelInfo)
                               5010                 :                :         {
                               5011                 :           2711 :             ExecInitResultRelation(estate, resultRelInfo, resultRelation);
                               5012                 :                : 
                               5013                 :                :             /*
                               5014                 :                :              * For child result relations, store the root result relation
                               5015                 :                :              * pointer.  We do so for the convenience of places that want to
                               5016                 :                :              * look at the query's original target relation but don't have the
                               5017                 :                :              * mtstate handy.
                               5018                 :                :              */
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5019                 :           2711 :             resultRelInfo->ri_RootResultRelInfo = mtstate->rootResultRelInfo;
                               5020                 :                :         }
                               5021                 :                : 
                               5022                 :                :         /* Initialize the usesFdwDirectModify flag */
 1459 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     5023                 :          61447 :         resultRelInfo->ri_usesFdwDirectModify =
                               5024                 :          61447 :             bms_is_member(i, node->fdwDirectModifyPlans);
                               5025                 :                : 
                               5026                 :                :         /*
                               5027                 :                :          * Verify result relation is a valid target for the current operation
                               5028                 :                :          */
  192 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     5029                 :          61447 :         CheckValidResultRel(resultRelInfo, operation, node->onConflictAction,
                               5030                 :                :                             mergeActions);
                               5031                 :                : 
 1810 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5032                 :          61279 :         resultRelInfo++;
                               5033                 :          61279 :         i++;
                               5034                 :                :     }
                               5035                 :                : 
                               5036                 :                :     /*
                               5037                 :                :      * Now we may initialize the subplan.
                               5038                 :                :      */
                               5039                 :          60053 :     outerPlanState(mtstate) = ExecInitNode(subplan, estate, eflags);
                               5040                 :                : 
                               5041                 :                :     /*
                               5042                 :                :      * Do additional per-result-relation initialization.
                               5043                 :                :      */
                               5044         [ +  + ]:         121315 :     for (i = 0; i < nrels; i++)
                               5045                 :                :     {
                               5046                 :          61262 :         resultRelInfo = &mtstate->resultRelInfo[i];
                               5047                 :                : 
                               5048                 :                :         /* Let FDWs init themselves for foreign-table result rels */
 3649 rhaas@postgresql.org     5049         [ +  + ]:          61262 :         if (!resultRelInfo->ri_usesFdwDirectModify &&
                               5050         [ +  + ]:          61158 :             resultRelInfo->ri_FdwRoutine != NULL &&
 4753 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5051         [ +  - ]:            170 :             resultRelInfo->ri_FdwRoutine->BeginForeignModify != NULL)
                               5052                 :                :         {
                               5053                 :            170 :             List       *fdw_private = (List *) list_nth(node->fdwPrivLists, i);
                               5054                 :                : 
                               5055                 :            170 :             resultRelInfo->ri_FdwRoutine->BeginForeignModify(mtstate,
                               5056                 :                :                                                              resultRelInfo,
                               5057                 :                :                                                              fdw_private,
                               5058                 :                :                                                              i,
                               5059                 :                :                                                              eflags);
                               5060                 :                :         }
                               5061                 :                : 
                               5062                 :                :         /*
                               5063                 :                :          * For UPDATE/DELETE/MERGE, find the appropriate junk attr now, either
                               5064                 :                :          * a 'ctid' or 'wholerow' attribute depending on relkind.  For foreign
                               5065                 :                :          * tables, the FDW might have created additional junk attr(s), but
                               5066                 :                :          * those are no concern of ours.
                               5067                 :                :          */
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     5068   [ +  +  +  +  :          61262 :         if (operation == CMD_UPDATE || operation == CMD_DELETE ||
                                              +  + ]
                               5069                 :                :             operation == CMD_MERGE)
                               5070                 :                :         {
                               5071                 :                :             char        relkind;
                               5072                 :                : 
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5073                 :          15661 :             relkind = resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc->rd_rel->relkind;
                               5074   [ +  +  +  + ]:          15661 :             if (relkind == RELKIND_RELATION ||
                               5075         [ +  + ]:            354 :                 relkind == RELKIND_MATVIEW ||
                               5076                 :                :                 relkind == RELKIND_PARTITIONED_TABLE)
                               5077                 :                :             {
                               5078                 :          15331 :                 resultRelInfo->ri_RowIdAttNo =
                               5079                 :          15331 :                     ExecFindJunkAttributeInTlist(subplan->targetlist, "ctid");
                               5080                 :                : 
                               5081                 :                :                 /*
                               5082                 :                :                  * For heap relations, a ctid junk attribute must be present.
                               5083                 :                :                  * Partitioned tables should only appear here when all leaf
                               5084                 :                :                  * partitions were pruned, in which case no rows can be
                               5085                 :                :                  * produced and ctid is not needed.
                               5086                 :                :                  */
   51 amitlan@postgresql.o     5087         [ +  + ]:          15331 :                 if (relkind == RELKIND_PARTITIONED_TABLE)
                               5088         [ -  + ]:             24 :                     Assert(nrels == 1);
                               5089         [ -  + ]:          15307 :                 else if (!AttributeNumberIsValid(resultRelInfo->ri_RowIdAttNo))
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5090         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                     elog(ERROR, "could not find junk ctid column");
                               5091                 :                :             }
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5092         [ +  + ]:CBC         330 :             else if (relkind == RELKIND_FOREIGN_TABLE)
                               5093                 :                :             {
                               5094                 :                :                 /*
                               5095                 :                :                  * We don't support MERGE with foreign tables for now.  (It's
                               5096                 :                :                  * problematic because the implementation uses CTID.)
                               5097                 :                :                  */
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     5098         [ -  + ]:            186 :                 Assert(operation != CMD_MERGE);
                               5099                 :                : 
                               5100                 :                :                 /*
                               5101                 :                :                  * When there is a row-level trigger, there should be a
                               5102                 :                :                  * wholerow attribute.  We also require it to be present in
                               5103                 :                :                  * UPDATE and MERGE, so we can get the values of unchanged
                               5104                 :                :                  * columns.
                               5105                 :                :                  */
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5106                 :            186 :                 resultRelInfo->ri_RowIdAttNo =
                               5107                 :            186 :                     ExecFindJunkAttributeInTlist(subplan->targetlist,
                               5108                 :                :                                                  "wholerow");
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     5109   [ +  +  -  + ]:            186 :                 if ((mtstate->operation == CMD_UPDATE || mtstate->operation == CMD_MERGE) &&
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5110         [ -  + ]:            105 :                     !AttributeNumberIsValid(resultRelInfo->ri_RowIdAttNo))
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5111         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                     elog(ERROR, "could not find junk wholerow column");
                               5112                 :                :             }
                               5113                 :                :             else
                               5114                 :                :             {
                               5115                 :                :                 /* Other valid target relkinds must provide wholerow */
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5116                 :CBC         144 :                 resultRelInfo->ri_RowIdAttNo =
                               5117                 :            144 :                     ExecFindJunkAttributeInTlist(subplan->targetlist,
                               5118                 :                :                                                  "wholerow");
                               5119         [ -  + ]:            144 :                 if (!AttributeNumberIsValid(resultRelInfo->ri_RowIdAttNo))
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5120         [ #  # ]:UBC           0 :                     elog(ERROR, "could not find junk wholerow column");
                               5121                 :                :             }
                               5122                 :                :         }
                               5123                 :                :     }
                               5124                 :                : 
                               5125                 :                :     /*
                               5126                 :                :      * If this is an inherited update/delete/merge, there will be a junk
                               5127                 :                :      * attribute named "tableoid" present in the subplan's targetlist.  It
                               5128                 :                :      * will be used to identify the result relation for a given tuple to be
                               5129                 :                :      * updated/deleted/merged.
                               5130                 :                :      */
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5131                 :CBC       60053 :     mtstate->mt_resultOidAttno =
                               5132                 :          60053 :         ExecFindJunkAttributeInTlist(subplan->targetlist, "tableoid");
  361 amitlan@postgresql.o     5133   [ +  +  -  + ]:          60053 :     Assert(AttributeNumberIsValid(mtstate->mt_resultOidAttno) || total_nrels == 1);
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5134                 :          60053 :     mtstate->mt_lastResultOid = InvalidOid; /* force lookup at first tuple */
                               5135                 :          60053 :     mtstate->mt_lastResultIndex = 0; /* must be zero if no such attr */
                               5136                 :                : 
                               5137                 :                :     /* Get the root target relation */
 1973 heikki.linnakangas@i     5138                 :          60053 :     rel = mtstate->rootResultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc;
                               5139                 :                : 
                               5140                 :                :     /*
                               5141                 :                :      * Build state for tuple routing if it's a partitioned INSERT.  An UPDATE
                               5142                 :                :      * or MERGE might need this too, but only if it actually moves tuples
                               5143                 :                :      * between partitions; in that case setup is done by
                               5144                 :                :      * ExecCrossPartitionUpdate.
                               5145                 :                :      */
 2977 rhaas@postgresql.org     5146   [ +  +  +  + ]:          60053 :     if (rel->rd_rel->relkind == RELKIND_PARTITIONED_TABLE &&
                               5147                 :                :         operation == CMD_INSERT)
 2943                          5148                 :           2325 :         mtstate->mt_partition_tuple_routing =
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5149                 :           2325 :             ExecSetupPartitionTupleRouting(estate, rel);
                               5150                 :                : 
                               5151                 :                :     /*
                               5152                 :                :      * Initialize any WITH CHECK OPTION constraints if needed.
                               5153                 :                :      */
 4623 sfrost@snowman.net       5154                 :          60053 :     resultRelInfo = mtstate->resultRelInfo;
  401 amitlan@postgresql.o     5155   [ +  +  +  +  :          60852 :     foreach(l, withCheckOptionLists)
                                              +  + ]
                               5156                 :                :     {
 4623 sfrost@snowman.net       5157                 :            799 :         List       *wcoList = (List *) lfirst(l);
                               5158                 :            799 :         List       *wcoExprs = NIL;
                               5159                 :                :         ListCell   *ll;
                               5160                 :                : 
                               5161   [ +  -  +  +  :           2359 :         foreach(ll, wcoList)
                                              +  + ]
                               5162                 :                :         {
                               5163                 :           1560 :             WithCheckOption *wco = (WithCheckOption *) lfirst(ll);
 3288 andres@anarazel.de       5164                 :           1560 :             ExprState  *wcoExpr = ExecInitQual((List *) wco->qual,
                               5165                 :                :                                                &mtstate->ps);
                               5166                 :                : 
 4623 sfrost@snowman.net       5167                 :           1560 :             wcoExprs = lappend(wcoExprs, wcoExpr);
                               5168                 :                :         }
                               5169                 :                : 
                               5170                 :            799 :         resultRelInfo->ri_WithCheckOptions = wcoList;
                               5171                 :            799 :         resultRelInfo->ri_WithCheckOptionExprs = wcoExprs;
                               5172                 :            799 :         resultRelInfo++;
                               5173                 :                :     }
                               5174                 :                : 
                               5175                 :                :     /*
                               5176                 :                :      * Initialize RETURNING projections if needed.
                               5177                 :                :      */
  401 amitlan@postgresql.o     5178         [ +  + ]:          60053 :     if (returningLists)
                               5179                 :                :     {
                               5180                 :                :         TupleTableSlot *slot;
                               5181                 :                :         ExprContext *econtext;
                               5182                 :                : 
                               5183                 :                :         /*
                               5184                 :                :          * Initialize result tuple slot and assign its rowtype using the plan
                               5185                 :                :          * node's declared targetlist, which the planner set up to be the same
                               5186                 :                :          * as the first (before runtime pruning) RETURNING list.  We assume
                               5187                 :                :          * all the result rels will produce compatible output.
                               5188                 :                :          */
 2677 andres@anarazel.de       5189                 :           3024 :         ExecInitResultTupleSlotTL(&mtstate->ps, &TTSOpsVirtual);
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5190                 :           3024 :         slot = mtstate->ps.ps_ResultTupleSlot;
                               5191                 :                : 
                               5192                 :                :         /* Need an econtext too */
 3288 andres@anarazel.de       5193         [ +  - ]:           3024 :         if (mtstate->ps.ps_ExprContext == NULL)
                               5194                 :           3024 :             ExecAssignExprContext(estate, &mtstate->ps);
                               5195                 :           3024 :         econtext = mtstate->ps.ps_ExprContext;
                               5196                 :                : 
                               5197                 :                :         /*
                               5198                 :                :          * Build a projection for each result rel.
                               5199                 :                :          */
 5497 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5200                 :           3024 :         resultRelInfo = mtstate->resultRelInfo;
  401 amitlan@postgresql.o     5201   [ +  -  +  +  :           6223 :         foreach(l, returningLists)
                                              +  + ]
                               5202                 :                :         {
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5203                 :           3199 :             List       *rlist = (List *) lfirst(l);
                               5204                 :                : 
 2900 rhaas@postgresql.org     5205                 :           3199 :             resultRelInfo->ri_returningList = rlist;
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5206                 :           3199 :             resultRelInfo->ri_projectReturning =
 3288 andres@anarazel.de       5207                 :           3199 :                 ExecBuildProjectionInfo(rlist, econtext, slot, &mtstate->ps,
 3189 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5208                 :           3199 :                                         resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc->rd_att);
 6000                          5209                 :           3199 :             resultRelInfo++;
                               5210                 :                :         }
                               5211                 :                :     }
                               5212                 :                :     else
                               5213                 :                :     {
                               5214                 :                :         /*
                               5215                 :                :          * We still must construct a dummy result tuple type, because InitPlan
                               5216                 :                :          * expects one (maybe should change that?).
                               5217                 :                :          */
 2683 andres@anarazel.de       5218                 :          57029 :         ExecInitResultTypeTL(&mtstate->ps);
                               5219                 :                : 
 6000 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5220                 :          57029 :         mtstate->ps.ps_ExprContext = NULL;
                               5221                 :                :     }
                               5222                 :                : 
                               5223                 :                :     /* Set the list of arbiter indexes if needed for ON CONFLICT */
 2911 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     5224                 :          60053 :     resultRelInfo = mtstate->resultRelInfo;
                               5225         [ +  + ]:          60053 :     if (node->onConflictAction != ONCONFLICT_NONE)
                               5226                 :                :     {
                               5227                 :                :         /* insert may only have one relation, inheritance is not expanded */
  361 amitlan@postgresql.o     5228         [ -  + ]:            907 :         Assert(total_nrels == 1);
 2911 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     5229                 :            907 :         resultRelInfo->ri_onConflictArbiterIndexes = node->arbiterIndexes;
                               5230                 :                :     }
                               5231                 :                : 
                               5232                 :                :     /*
                               5233                 :                :      * For ON CONFLICT DO SELECT/UPDATE, initialize the ON CONFLICT action
                               5234                 :                :      * state.
                               5235                 :                :      */
   31 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     5236         [ +  + ]:GNC       60053 :     if (node->onConflictAction == ONCONFLICT_UPDATE ||
                               5237         [ +  + ]:          59554 :         node->onConflictAction == ONCONFLICT_SELECT)
                               5238                 :                :     {
                               5239                 :            667 :         OnConflictActionState *onconfl = makeNode(OnConflictActionState);
                               5240                 :                : 
                               5241                 :                :         /* already exists if created by RETURNING processing above */
 3964 andres@anarazel.de       5242         [ +  + ]:CBC         667 :         if (mtstate->ps.ps_ExprContext == NULL)
                               5243                 :            350 :             ExecAssignExprContext(estate, &mtstate->ps);
                               5244                 :                : 
                               5245                 :                :         /* action state for DO SELECT/UPDATE */
 1770 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5246                 :            667 :         resultRelInfo->ri_onConflict = onconfl;
                               5247                 :                : 
                               5248                 :                :         /* lock strength for DO SELECT [FOR UPDATE/SHARE] */
   31 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     5249                 :GNC         667 :         onconfl->oc_LockStrength = node->onConflictLockStrength;
                               5250                 :                : 
                               5251                 :                :         /* initialize slot for the existing tuple */
 1770 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5252                 :CBC         667 :         onconfl->oc_Existing =
 2561 andres@anarazel.de       5253                 :            667 :             table_slot_create(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc,
                               5254                 :            667 :                               &mtstate->ps.state->es_tupleTable);
                               5255                 :                : 
                               5256                 :                :         /*
                               5257                 :                :          * For ON CONFLICT DO UPDATE, initialize target list and projection.
                               5258                 :                :          */
   31 dean.a.rasheed@gmail     5259         [ +  + ]:GNC         667 :         if (node->onConflictAction == ONCONFLICT_UPDATE)
                               5260                 :                :         {
                               5261                 :                :             ExprContext *econtext;
                               5262                 :                :             TupleDesc   relationDesc;
                               5263                 :                : 
                               5264                 :            499 :             econtext = mtstate->ps.ps_ExprContext;
                               5265                 :            499 :             relationDesc = resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc->rd_att;
                               5266                 :                : 
                               5267                 :                :             /*
                               5268                 :                :              * Create the tuple slot for the UPDATE SET projection. We want a
                               5269                 :                :              * slot of the table's type here, because the slot will be used to
                               5270                 :                :              * insert into the table, and for RETURNING processing - which may
                               5271                 :                :              * access system attributes.
                               5272                 :                :              */
                               5273                 :            499 :             onconfl->oc_ProjSlot =
                               5274                 :            499 :                 table_slot_create(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc,
                               5275                 :            499 :                                   &mtstate->ps.state->es_tupleTable);
                               5276                 :                : 
                               5277                 :                :             /* build UPDATE SET projection state */
                               5278                 :            499 :             onconfl->oc_ProjInfo =
                               5279                 :            499 :                 ExecBuildUpdateProjection(node->onConflictSet,
                               5280                 :                :                                           true,
                               5281                 :                :                                           node->onConflictCols,
                               5282                 :                :                                           relationDesc,
                               5283                 :                :                                           econtext,
                               5284                 :                :                                           onconfl->oc_ProjSlot,
                               5285                 :                :                                           &mtstate->ps);
                               5286                 :                :         }
                               5287                 :                : 
                               5288                 :                :         /* initialize state to evaluate the WHERE clause, if any */
 3964 andres@anarazel.de       5289         [ +  + ]:CBC         667 :         if (node->onConflictWhere)
                               5290                 :                :         {
                               5291                 :                :             ExprState  *qualexpr;
                               5292                 :                : 
 3288                          5293                 :            154 :             qualexpr = ExecInitQual((List *) node->onConflictWhere,
                               5294                 :                :                                     &mtstate->ps);
 1770 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5295                 :            154 :             onconfl->oc_WhereClause = qualexpr;
                               5296                 :                :         }
                               5297                 :                :     }
                               5298                 :                : 
                               5299                 :                :     /*
                               5300                 :                :      * If we have any secondary relations in an UPDATE or DELETE, they need to
                               5301                 :                :      * be treated like non-locked relations in SELECT FOR UPDATE, i.e., the
                               5302                 :                :      * EvalPlanQual mechanism needs to be told about them.  This also goes for
                               5303                 :                :      * the source relations in a MERGE.  Locate the relevant ExecRowMarks.
                               5304                 :                :      */
 1810                          5305                 :          60053 :     arowmarks = NIL;
 5984                          5306   [ +  +  +  +  :          61491 :     foreach(l, node->rowMarks)
                                              +  + ]
                               5307                 :                :     {
 3261                          5308                 :           1438 :         PlanRowMark *rc = lfirst_node(PlanRowMark, l);
   58 amitlan@postgresql.o     5309                 :           1438 :         RangeTblEntry *rte = exec_rt_fetch(rc->rti, estate);
                               5310                 :                :         ExecRowMark *erm;
                               5311                 :                :         ExecAuxRowMark *aerm;
                               5312                 :                : 
                               5313                 :                :         /* ignore "parent" rowmarks; they are irrelevant at runtime */
                               5314         [ +  + ]:           1438 :         if (rc->isParent)
                               5315                 :             71 :             continue;
                               5316                 :                : 
                               5317                 :                :         /*
                               5318                 :                :          * Also ignore rowmarks belonging to child tables that have been
                               5319                 :                :          * pruned in ExecDoInitialPruning().
                               5320                 :                :          */
                               5321         [ +  + ]:           1367 :         if (rte->rtekind == RTE_RELATION &&
  401                          5322         [ -  + ]:           1074 :             !bms_is_member(rc->rti, estate->es_unpruned_relids))
 5984 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5323                 :UBC           0 :             continue;
                               5324                 :                : 
                               5325                 :                :         /* Find ExecRowMark and build ExecAuxRowMark */
 3960 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5326                 :CBC        1367 :         erm = ExecFindRowMark(estate, rc->rti, false);
 1810                          5327                 :           1367 :         aerm = ExecBuildAuxRowMark(erm, subplan->targetlist);
                               5328                 :           1367 :         arowmarks = lappend(arowmarks, aerm);
                               5329                 :                :     }
                               5330                 :                : 
                               5331                 :                :     /* For a MERGE command, initialize its state */
 1448 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     5332         [ +  + ]:          60053 :     if (mtstate->operation == CMD_MERGE)
                               5333                 :            816 :         ExecInitMerge(mtstate, estate);
                               5334                 :                : 
 1810 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5335                 :          60053 :     EvalPlanQualSetPlan(&mtstate->mt_epqstate, subplan, arowmarks);
                               5336                 :                : 
                               5337                 :                :     /*
                               5338                 :                :      * If there are a lot of result relations, use a hash table to speed the
                               5339                 :                :      * lookups.  If there are not a lot, a simple linear search is faster.
                               5340                 :                :      *
                               5341                 :                :      * It's not clear where the threshold is, but try 64 for starters.  In a
                               5342                 :                :      * debugging build, use a small threshold so that we get some test
                               5343                 :                :      * coverage of both code paths.
                               5344                 :                :      */
                               5345                 :                : #ifdef USE_ASSERT_CHECKING
                               5346                 :                : #define MT_NRELS_HASH 4
                               5347                 :                : #else
                               5348                 :                : #define MT_NRELS_HASH 64
                               5349                 :                : #endif
                               5350         [ +  + ]:          60053 :     if (nrels >= MT_NRELS_HASH)
                               5351                 :                :     {
                               5352                 :                :         HASHCTL     hash_ctl;
                               5353                 :                : 
                               5354                 :            167 :         hash_ctl.keysize = sizeof(Oid);
                               5355                 :            167 :         hash_ctl.entrysize = sizeof(MTTargetRelLookup);
                               5356                 :            167 :         hash_ctl.hcxt = CurrentMemoryContext;
                               5357                 :            167 :         mtstate->mt_resultOidHash =
                               5358                 :            167 :             hash_create("ModifyTable target hash",
                               5359                 :                :                         nrels, &hash_ctl,
                               5360                 :                :                         HASH_ELEM | HASH_BLOBS | HASH_CONTEXT);
                               5361         [ +  + ]:            934 :         for (i = 0; i < nrels; i++)
                               5362                 :                :         {
                               5363                 :                :             Oid         hashkey;
                               5364                 :                :             MTTargetRelLookup *mtlookup;
                               5365                 :                :             bool        found;
                               5366                 :                : 
                               5367                 :            767 :             resultRelInfo = &mtstate->resultRelInfo[i];
                               5368                 :            767 :             hashkey = RelationGetRelid(resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc);
                               5369                 :                :             mtlookup = (MTTargetRelLookup *)
                               5370                 :            767 :                 hash_search(mtstate->mt_resultOidHash, &hashkey,
                               5371                 :                :                             HASH_ENTER, &found);
                               5372         [ -  + ]:            767 :             Assert(!found);
                               5373                 :            767 :             mtlookup->relationIndex = i;
                               5374                 :                :         }
                               5375                 :                :     }
                               5376                 :                :     else
                               5377                 :          59886 :         mtstate->mt_resultOidHash = NULL;
                               5378                 :                : 
                               5379                 :                :     /*
                               5380                 :                :      * Determine if the FDW supports batch insert and determine the batch size
                               5381                 :                :      * (a FDW may support batching, but it may be disabled for the
                               5382                 :                :      * server/table).
                               5383                 :                :      *
                               5384                 :                :      * We only do this for INSERT, so that for UPDATE/DELETE the batch size
                               5385                 :                :      * remains set to 0.
                               5386                 :                :      */
 1879 tomas.vondra@postgre     5387         [ +  + ]:          60053 :     if (operation == CMD_INSERT)
                               5388                 :                :     {
                               5389                 :                :         /* insert may only have one relation, inheritance is not expanded */
  361 amitlan@postgresql.o     5390         [ -  + ]:          45601 :         Assert(total_nrels == 1);
 1879 tomas.vondra@postgre     5391                 :          45601 :         resultRelInfo = mtstate->resultRelInfo;
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5392         [ +  - ]:          45601 :         if (!resultRelInfo->ri_usesFdwDirectModify &&
                               5393         [ +  + ]:          45601 :             resultRelInfo->ri_FdwRoutine != NULL &&
                               5394         [ +  - ]:             88 :             resultRelInfo->ri_FdwRoutine->GetForeignModifyBatchSize &&
                               5395         [ +  - ]:             88 :             resultRelInfo->ri_FdwRoutine->ExecForeignBatchInsert)
                               5396                 :                :         {
                               5397                 :             88 :             resultRelInfo->ri_BatchSize =
                               5398                 :             88 :                 resultRelInfo->ri_FdwRoutine->GetForeignModifyBatchSize(resultRelInfo);
 1879 tomas.vondra@postgre     5399         [ -  + ]:             88 :             Assert(resultRelInfo->ri_BatchSize >= 1);
                               5400                 :                :         }
                               5401                 :                :         else
 1804 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5402                 :          45513 :             resultRelInfo->ri_BatchSize = 1;
                               5403                 :                :     }
                               5404                 :                : 
                               5405                 :                :     /*
                               5406                 :                :      * Lastly, if this is not the primary (canSetTag) ModifyTable node, add it
                               5407                 :                :      * to estate->es_auxmodifytables so that it will be run to completion by
                               5408                 :                :      * ExecPostprocessPlan.  (It'd actually work fine to add the primary
                               5409                 :                :      * ModifyTable node too, but there's no need.)  Note the use of lcons not
                               5410                 :                :      * lappend: we need later-initialized ModifyTable nodes to be shut down
                               5411                 :                :      * before earlier ones.  This ensures that we don't throw away RETURNING
                               5412                 :                :      * rows that need to be seen by a later CTE subplan.
                               5413                 :                :      */
 5497                          5414         [ +  + ]:          60053 :     if (!mtstate->canSetTag)
                               5415                 :            494 :         estate->es_auxmodifytables = lcons(mtstate,
                               5416                 :                :                                            estate->es_auxmodifytables);
                               5417                 :                : 
 6000                          5418                 :          60053 :     return mtstate;
                               5419                 :                : }
                               5420                 :                : 
                               5421                 :                : /* ----------------------------------------------------------------
                               5422                 :                :  *      ExecEndModifyTable
                               5423                 :                :  *
                               5424                 :                :  *      Shuts down the plan.
                               5425                 :                :  *
                               5426                 :                :  *      Returns nothing of interest.
                               5427                 :                :  * ----------------------------------------------------------------
                               5428                 :                :  */
                               5429                 :                : void
                               5430                 :          57798 : ExecEndModifyTable(ModifyTableState *node)
                               5431                 :                : {
                               5432                 :                :     int         i;
                               5433                 :                : 
                               5434                 :                :     /*
                               5435                 :                :      * Allow any FDWs to shut down
                               5436                 :                :      */
 1810                          5437         [ +  + ]:         116650 :     for (i = 0; i < node->mt_nrels; i++)
                               5438                 :                :     {
                               5439                 :                :         int         j;
 4753                          5440                 :          58852 :         ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo = node->resultRelInfo + i;
                               5441                 :                : 
 3649 rhaas@postgresql.org     5442         [ +  + ]:          58852 :         if (!resultRelInfo->ri_usesFdwDirectModify &&
                               5443         [ +  + ]:          58756 :             resultRelInfo->ri_FdwRoutine != NULL &&
 4753 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5444         [ +  - ]:            156 :             resultRelInfo->ri_FdwRoutine->EndForeignModify != NULL)
                               5445                 :            156 :             resultRelInfo->ri_FdwRoutine->EndForeignModify(node->ps.state,
                               5446                 :                :                                                            resultRelInfo);
                               5447                 :                : 
                               5448                 :                :         /*
                               5449                 :                :          * Cleanup the initialized batch slots. This only matters for FDWs
                               5450                 :                :          * with batching, but the other cases will have ri_NumSlotsInitialized
                               5451                 :                :          * == 0.
                               5452                 :                :          */
 1738 tomas.vondra@postgre     5453         [ +  + ]:          58880 :         for (j = 0; j < resultRelInfo->ri_NumSlotsInitialized; j++)
                               5454                 :                :         {
                               5455                 :             28 :             ExecDropSingleTupleTableSlot(resultRelInfo->ri_Slots[j]);
                               5456                 :             28 :             ExecDropSingleTupleTableSlot(resultRelInfo->ri_PlanSlots[j]);
                               5457                 :                :         }
                               5458                 :                :     }
                               5459                 :                : 
                               5460                 :                :     /*
                               5461                 :                :      * Close all the partitioned tables, leaf partitions, and their indices
                               5462                 :                :      * and release the slot used for tuple routing, if set.
                               5463                 :                :      */
 2992 rhaas@postgresql.org     5464         [ +  + ]:          57798 :     if (node->mt_partition_tuple_routing)
                               5465                 :                :     {
 2900                          5466                 :           2350 :         ExecCleanupTupleRouting(node, node->mt_partition_tuple_routing);
                               5467                 :                : 
 2676 alvherre@alvh.no-ip.     5468         [ +  + ]:           2350 :         if (node->mt_root_tuple_slot)
                               5469                 :            334 :             ExecDropSingleTupleTableSlot(node->mt_root_tuple_slot);
                               5470                 :                :     }
                               5471                 :                : 
                               5472                 :                :     /*
                               5473                 :                :      * Terminate EPQ execution if active
                               5474                 :                :      */
 5984 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5475                 :          57798 :     EvalPlanQualEnd(&node->mt_epqstate);
                               5476                 :                : 
                               5477                 :                :     /*
                               5478                 :                :      * shut down subplan
                               5479                 :                :      */
 1810                          5480                 :          57798 :     ExecEndNode(outerPlanState(node));
 6000                          5481                 :          57798 : }
                               5482                 :                : 
                               5483                 :                : void
 5725 tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us        5484                 :UBC           0 : ExecReScanModifyTable(ModifyTableState *node)
                               5485                 :                : {
                               5486                 :                :     /*
                               5487                 :                :      * Currently, we don't need to support rescan on ModifyTable nodes. The
                               5488                 :                :      * semantics of that would be a bit debatable anyway.
                               5489                 :                :      */
 6000                          5490         [ #  # ]:              0 :     elog(ERROR, "ExecReScanModifyTable is not implemented");
                               5491                 :                : }
        

Generated by: LCOV version 2.4-beta